Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.

No preview available

The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutFinal Gaines St PS Liner Specs (7.22.2021) CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND PORT TOWNSEND, WA BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the construction of the GAINES STREET PUMP STATION LINER RETROFIT **** **** JACOBS Seattle, Washington July 2021 © Jacobs 2021. All rights reserved. This document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein, as an instrument of professional service, is the property of Jacobs and is not to be used in whole or part, for any other project without the written authorization of Jacobs. Project No. PW\DEN003\709275 Copy No. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SEALS PAGE JULY 2021 00 01 07 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE PART 1 – PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS PART 2 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PART 3 – SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (EXCEPT 01 88 15) SECTION 02 41 00, DEMOLITION DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK SECTION 33 32 13.14, PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, GRINDER PUMP TYPE William S. Farmer 07/21/21 7-21-21 CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SEALS PAGE PW\DEN003\709275 00 01 07 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS PART 3 – SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 01 88 15, ANCHORAGE AND BRACING SECTION 03 30 10, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 05 05 00, METAL FABRICATIONS Christina Marie Kapoi 07/21/21 CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SEALS PAGE JULY 2021 00 01 07 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS PART 3 – SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 26 05 01, ELECTRICAL Jacob Daniel Hellen 07/21/21 END OF SECTION 2021.07.21 09:41:16-07'00' CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TABLE OF CONTENTS JULY 2021 00 01 10 - iii ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS TABLE OF CONTENTS Pages PART 1—PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids ............................................................ 1- 1 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders ............................................................. 1- 8 00 41 13 Bid Form (Stipulated Price Basis) ........................................... 1- 6 00 43 13 Bid Bond .................................................................................. 1- 3 00 43 36 Subcontractor’s Listing – RCW 39.30.060 .............................. 1- 1 00 43 37 Mandatory Responsible Bidder’s Criteria Form ...................... 1- 2 00 43 38 Bidder Qualification Form ....................................................... 1- 1 00 43 39 FRP Wetwell Manufacturer Qualification Form ..................... 1- 1 PART 2—CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING FORMS 00 52 13 Agreement ................................................................................ 1- 8 PROJECT FORMS Labor and Materials Payment Bond ...................................................................... 1- 2 Performance Bond ................................................................................................. 1- 1 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00 72 00 General Conditions .................................................................. 1- 52 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions ....................................................... 1- 13 PART 3—SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work .................................................................... 1- 1 01 29 00 Payment Procedures ................................................................. 1- 3 01 31 13 Project Coordination ................................................................ 1- 5 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation .................................... 1- 6 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ............................................................... 1- 9 Supplement: Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal ..................................... 1- 1 01 43 33 Manufacturers’ Field Services ................................................. 1- 4 Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation .................... 1- 1 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control ...................................................... 1- 9 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ........................................... 1- 10 CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS PW\DEN003\709275 00 01 10 - iv JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control .............................. 1- 19 01 57 28 Temporary Flow Control ......................................................... 1- 6 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements .............................................. 1- 7 Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance .............................. 1- 1 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures................................................................. 1- 4 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ............................................. 1- 6 Supplement: Maintenance Summary Form ................................................... 1- 2 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing ............................................................ 1- 5 01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup .................................. 1- 6 Supplements: Unit Process Startup Form ....................................................... 1- 1 Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form ........ 1- 1 DIVISION 02—EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Demolition ............................................................................... 1- 7 DIVISION 03—CONCRETE 03 30 10 Structural Concrete .................................................................. 1- 18 Supplement: Concrete Mix Design, Class 4500F2S1P1C1 .......................... 1- 2 DIVISION 04 (NOT USED) DIVISION 05—METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ................................................................... 1- 7 DIVISIONS 06—25 (NOT USED) DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 Electrical .................................................................................. 1- 14 DIVISIONS 27—30 (NOT USED) DIVISION 31—EARTHWORK 31 23 16 Excavation................................................................................ 1- 3 31 23 19.01 Dewatering ............................................................................... 1- 3 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill ....................................................................... 1- 9 CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT Pages PW\DEN003\709275 TABLE OF CONTENTS JULY 2021 00 01 10 - v ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS DIVISION 33—UTILITIES 33 32 13.14 Packaged Sewage Lift Stations, Submersible Pump Type ...... 1- 16 Supplement: Gaines Street Submersible Pump Data Sheet .......................... 1- 2 DIVISIONS 34—49 (NOT USED) PART 4—DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY) END OF SECTION PART 1 PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS JULY 2021 00 11 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed Bids for construction of Gaines Street Pump Station Liner Retrofit, will be received at the office of the City of Port Townsend, 250 Madison Street Suite 2R, Port Townsend, WA, 98368. Attn: David Peterson, City Engineer (Owner), until 2:00 p.m., local time, on the 26th day of August 2021. Any Bids received after the specified time will not be considered. Bids will then be publicly opened and read at the location, time, and date cited above. The Project contemplated consists of providing Owner with a fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) wetwell liner installed inside the existing concrete wetwell with a new H-20-rated top slab and access hatch and includes all new internal components: three submersible pumps with discharge elbow/guide rail system, discharge piping, and two new level sensing elements. The Work shall be substantially completed no later than July 1, 2022. Electronic copies of Bidding Documents consisting of Plans and Specifications may be obtained from Builder’s Exchange of Washington website for Public Works Open Projects (http://www.bxwa.com/bxwa_toc/pub/311.html). Each Bid must be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form and accompanied by Bid security as prescribed in the Instructions to Bidders, and other required documentation. The Successful Bidder will be required to furnish the additional bond(s) and insurance prescribed in the Bidding Documents. In order to submit a Bid on public work, Bidders and their Subcontractors shall hold such licenses and registrations as required by Revised Code of Washington, and federal and local Laws and Regulations. Bidders will be required to comply with State of Washington RCW 39.30.060 relating to identification of Subcontractors. For information concerning the proposed Work or an appointment to visit the Site, contact David Peterson, telephone: (360) 379-5088, e-mail: dpeterson@cityofpt.us. Owner’s right is reserved to reject all Bids or any Bid not conforming to the intent and purpose of the Bidding Documents. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS JULY 2021 00 21 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. DEFINED TERMS 1.1. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below: 1.1.1. Issuing Office—The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and where the bidding procedures are to be administered. 2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids. Neither Owner nor Engineer assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.2. Drawings bound in the Bidding Documents are electronic reductions of original productions. Amount of reduction is indicated by a note or scale bar on Drawing. Full-size Drawings may be obtained from Owner at cost of reproduction and handling, plus postage for mailing (if mailing is requested). Drawings will only be made available to firms listed as having complete sets of Bidding Documents. No return of full-size Drawings is required, and no refund will be made. 2.3. Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents made available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license or grant for any other use. 3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.1. In order to perform public work, Bidder and its Subcontractors, prior to award of Contract or as otherwise required by the jurisdiction, shall hold or obtain such licenses as required by State Statutes, and federal and local Laws and Regulations. 3.2. To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, within 5 days of Owner’s request, Bidder shall submit previous experience, Bidder Qualification Form, and other items stated herein the bidding documents. Bidder shall provide additional written evidence such as financial data, present commitments, and such other data within 5 days of Owner’s request. 3.3. Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring representations and certifications. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW\DEN003\709275 00 21 13 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.4. Per RCW 39.06.010, Bidders who have violated RCW 50.12.070, 51.16.070 or 82.32.070, concerning payroll records and tax records, within the last 2 years are prohibited from Bidding. 4. REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS 4.1. All Bidders, including general contractors and specialty contractors, shall be registered as Contractors by the State Department of Licenses in conformance with the requirements of applicable parts of Chapter 18.27, RCW. 5. EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND SITE 5.1. It is responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to: 5.1.1. Examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and any Addenda. 5.1.2. Visit the Site to become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 5.1.3. Become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 5.1.4. Consider the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 5.1.4.1. Cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 5.1.4.2. Means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents. 5.1.4.3. Bidder’s safety precautions and programs. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS JULY 2021 00 21 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 5.1.5. Agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) Bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 5.1.6. Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. 5.1.7. Promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in Bidding Documents and confirm that written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. 5.1.8. Determine Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work. 5.2. Submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this article; that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by Bidding Documents and applying specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by Bidding Documents; that Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer are acceptable to Bidder; and that Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work. 6. SITE AND OTHER AREAS 6.1. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. 7. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the office issuing documents as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than 10 days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW\DEN003\709275 00 21 13 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 7.2. Addenda may also be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. 8. BID SECURITY 8.1. Bid shall be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check, bank money order, or a penal Bid bond (on the attached form), issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions. 8.2. The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within the time period specified in Article Signing of Agreement, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of the 7th day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the number of days specified for all Bids to remain subject to acceptance in Article Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. 8.3. Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be returned within 7 days after Bid opening. 9. CONTRACT TIMES 9.1. The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement. 10. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 10.1. Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement. 11. SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS 11.1. The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment may be CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS JULY 2021 00 21 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 12. EMPLOYMENT REQUIREMENTS 12.1. Minority Businesses: In accordance with RCW 35.22.650, Bidder agrees that it shall actively solicit Bids for the subcontracting of goods or services from qualified minority businesses. Bidder shall furnish evidence of its compliance with these requirements of minority employment and solicitation. Bidder further agrees to consider the grant of subcontracts to minority bidders when substantially equal proposals are received. Bidder shall submit evidence of compliance with this requirement as part of Bid. 13. WAGE RATES 13.1. The Work under these Bidding Documents is to be paid for by public funds; therefore, minimum prevailing wage rates published by the State of Washington are applicable. Refer to Paragraph 7.10 of the Supplementary Conditions for more information. 14. PREPARATION OF BID 14.1. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by typing or printing with ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each Bid item listed therein or the words “No Bid,” “No Change,” or “Not Applicable” entered. 14.2. A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown. 14.3. A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown. 14.4. A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown. 14.5. A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW\DEN003\709275 00 21 13 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 14.6. A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown. 14.7. All names shall be typed or printed in ink below the signatures. 14.8. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda; the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. 14.9. Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 14.10. The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number and class, if applicable, shall also be shown on the Bid Form. 15. BASIS OF BID; COMPARISON OF BIDS 15.1. Lump Sum: 15.1.1. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form. 16. SUBMISSION OF BID 16.1. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the following data: 16.1.1. Subcontractor Listing – RCW 39.30.060 Form 16.1.2. Mandatory Responsible Bidder’s Criteria Form 16.1.3. Bidder Qualification Form 16.1.4. Qualification Form for FRP Wetwell Manufacturer 16.1.5. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project (as reflected on the Mandatory Responsible Bidder’s Criteria Form and the Bid Form); or a written covenant to obtain such license within the time for acceptance of Bids. 16.2. A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed, and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids. Enclose Bid in a plainly marked package with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), name and address of Bidder, and accompanied by the CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS JULY 2021 00 21 13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.” 17. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID 17.1. A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. 17.2. If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work. 18. OPENING OF BIDS 18.1. Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and unless obviously nonresponsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 19. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 19.1. All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. 20. EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT 20.1. Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Owner further reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. Owner may also reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder. Owner also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. 20.2. More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW\DEN003\709275 00 21 13 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest. 20.3. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 20.4. In evaluating Bidders, Owner may consider the qualifications of Bidders and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be submitted either with the Bid, or otherwise prior to issuance of the Notice of Award. 20.5. Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 20.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will award the Contract to Bidder whose Bid is in the best interests of the Project. 21. CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE 21.1. Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to bonds and insurance. When Successful Bidder delivers executed Agreement to Owner, it shall be accompanied by such bonds. 22. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 22.1. When Owner issues a Notice of Award to Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents that are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner. Within 10 days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Successful Bidder with a complete set of Drawings with appropriate identification. 23. RETAINAGE 23.1. Provisions concerning retainage and Contractor’s rights to deposit securities in lieu of retainage, if applicable, are set forth in the Agreement. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 BID FORM JULY 2021 00 41 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS NOTE TO BIDDER: Use typewriter or ink for completing this Bid Form. BID FORM (STIPULATED PRICE BASIS) 1. BID RECIPIENT 1.1. This Bid is submitted to: Owner: City of Port Townsend Address: 250 Madison Street Suite 2R, Port Townsend, WA, 98368 Project Identification: Gaines Street Pump Station Liner Retrofit 1.2. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 2. BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 2.1. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner. 3. BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3.1. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: 3.1.1. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged. Addendum No. Addendum Date (Bidder shall insert number of each Addendum received.) CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT BID FORM PW\DEN003\709275 00 41 13 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.1.2. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.1.3. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.1.4. Bidder’s bid is based upon pricing from the experienced and qualified (as demonstrated from the Qualification Form for FRP Wetwell Manufacturer) manufacturer of a Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) wetwell for sewer lift stations to which Bidder will subcontract for this Project. Manufacturer name that Bidder shall subcontract with:__________________________________. 3.1.5. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs. 3.1.6. Based on information and observations referred to in paragraph above, Bidder does not consider that further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) Bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 3.1.7. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. 3.1.8. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. 3.1.9. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 BID FORM JULY 2021 00 41 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION 4.1. Bidder certifies: 4.1.1. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; 4.1.2. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; 4.1.3. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and 4.1.4. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this paragraph: 4.1.4.1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process; 4.1.4.2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid prices at artificial noncompetitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition; 4.1.4.3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, noncompetitive levels; and 4.1.4.4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. 4.1.5. Required sales and use taxes are included in the stated Bid prices for the Work unless provision is made herein for the Bidder to separately itemize the estimated amount of sales tax or if Instructions to Bidders state Owner is tax exempt. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT BID FORM PW\DEN003\709275 00 41 13 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 5. BASIS OF BIDS 5.1. Bidder shall complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s): 5.2. Lump Sum Bid Price: $ 6. INCIDENTAL WORK ITEMS 6.1. Items not specifically described in the Bid Table but necessary to complete the Work shall be considered to be incidental to the Work and shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid items. 7. TIME OF COMPLETION 7.1. Bidder agrees the Work, and any Milestones specified in Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates, or within the number of calendar days, indicated in the Agreement. 7.2. Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work, and any specified Milestones, by the dates specified in the Agreement. 8. ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 8.1. The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid: 8.1.1. Required Bid security in the form of Bid bond. 8.1.2. Subcontractor Listing – RCW 39.30.060 Form 8.1.3. Mandatory Responsible Bidder’s Criteria Form 8.1.4. Bidder Qualification Form 8.1.5. Qualification Form for FRP Wetwell Manufacturer 8.1.6. Evidence of authority to do business in Washington State (as reflected on the Mandatory Responsible Bidder’s Criteria Form and the Bid Form); or a written covenant to obtain such license within the time for acceptance of Bids. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 BID FORM JULY 2021 00 41 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 9. DEFINED TERMS 9.1. The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. 10. BID SUBMITTAL 10.1. This Bid submitted by: If Bidder is: An Individual Name (typed or printed): By (signature): Doing business as: A Partnership Partnership Name: (SEAL) By: (Signature of general partner – attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): A Corporation Corporation Name: (SEAL) State of Incorporation: Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability): By: (Signature – attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest: (Signature of Corporate Secretary) CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT BID FORM PW\DEN003\709275 00 41 13 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Date of Qualification to do business in (state where Project is located) is: __________________________________. A Joint Venture Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL) By: (Signature of joint venture partner – attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: (Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.) Bidder’s Business Address: Phone No.: FAX No.: E-mail: SUBMITTED on , 20 Washington Contractor’s License No.: Contractor’s License Class (where applicable): END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 BID BOND JULY 2021 00 43 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS BID BOND Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. BIDDER (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): BID Bid Due Date: Project (Brief Description Including Location): BOND Bond Number: Date (Not later than Bid due date): Penal sum (Words) (Figures) Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT BID BOND PW\DEN003\709275 00 43 13 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS BIDDER SURETY (Seal) (Seal) Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature and Title Signature and Title (Attach Power of Attorney) Attest: Attest: Signature and Title Signature and Title Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving required notice. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 BID BOND JULY 2021 00 43 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Surety’s liability. 2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents. 3. This obligation shall be null and void if: 3.1. Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or 3.2. All Bids are rejected by Owner, or 3.3. Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof). 4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default by Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due. 5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Surety’s written consent. 6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid due date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located. 8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect. 11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING JULY 2021 RCW 39.30.060 FORM ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 00 43 36 - 1 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING – RCW 39.30.060 FORM In conformance with RCW 39.30.060, and its most recent updates, Bidder shall provide names of the Subcontractors with whom Bidder will subcontract for the performance of the Work listed below. If Bidder intends to perform the Work, Bidder shall enter its name for that category of Work. For work types listed below that are not applicable to this Work, leave the associated line for “Firm Name” blank. Failure of the Bidder to submit the NAMES of such Subcontractors or to name itself to perform such Work shall render the Bidder’s Bid nonresponsive and, therefore, void. Designated Work Firm Name 1. Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 2. Plumbing 3. Electrical 4. Structural Steel 5. Structural Rebar END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 MANDATORY RESPONSIBLE JULY 2021 BIDDER’S CRITERIA ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 00 43 37 - 1 MANDATORY RESPONSIBLE BIDDER’S CRITERIA Contractor’s License No.: _____________________________________________________ UBI No.: ___________________________________________________________________ Do you have Industrial Coverage? Yes No Employment Security Department No.:_________________________________ State Excise Tax Registration No.:_____________________________________ Is your firm currently disqualified from bidding? Yes No Has your firm received a citation or assessment for a willful violation as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of Chapter 49.46, 49.48 or 49.52 RCW in the preceding 3 years? Yes No Subcontractor Responsibility: A. The Contractor shall include the language of this section in each of its first tier subcontracts, and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this section apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. B. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its first tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria: 1. Have a current certificate of registration in compliance with Chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal; 2. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number; 3. If applicable, have: a. Have Industrial Insurance (workers’ compensation) coverage for the subcontractor’s employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW; b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW; CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT MANDATORY RESPONSIBLE PW\DEN003\709275 BIDDER’S CRITERIA JULY 2021 00 43 37 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS c. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW; d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW; e. An elevator contractor license, if required by Chapter 70.87 RCW. 4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM JULY 2021 00 43 38 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM Provide evidence of experience for rehabilitation of sewer lift stations, including bypass pumping, by documenting at least three representative projects within the past seven (7) years of similar size and character to the specified unit. Engineer will request verification of the owner contacts provided. Project Name Project Owner and Location Lift Station Capacity (gpm) Work Start to Completion (MM/YY-MM/YY) Owner Contact (Name, Phone, Email) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 FRP WETWELL MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATION FORM JULY 2021 00 43 39 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS FRP WETWELL MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATION FORM Provide evidence of experience for manufacture of FRP wetwells for sewer lift station service by documenting at least five representative projects within the past five (5) years of similar size and character to the specified unit. Engineer will request verification of the owner contacts provided. . Project Name Project Owner and Location Wetwell Diameter (feet) Work Start to Completion (MM/YY-MM/YY) Owner Contact (Name, Phone, Email) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PART 2 CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 AGREEMENT JULY 2021 00 52 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Port Townsend (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants set forth herein, agree as follows: 1. WORK 1.1. Contractor shall complete the Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: 1.1.1. Provide Owner with a fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) wetwell liner installed inside the existing concrete wetwell with a new H-20-rated top slab and access hatch and includes all new internal components: three submersible pumps with discharge elbow/guide rail system, discharge piping, and two new level sensing elements. 2. THE PROJECT 2.1. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: 2.1.1. Gaines Street Pump Station Liner Retrofit. 3. ENGINEER 3.1. The Project has been designed by Jacobs Engineering (Engineer), who is to act as Owner’s representative, assume duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. CONTRACT TIMES 4.1. Time of the Essence: Time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment (Final Completion) as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT AGREEMENT PW\DEN003\709275 00 52 13 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4.2. Dates by which achieving Substantial Completion and Final Payment are required: 4.2.1. The Work shall be substantially completed (new wet well fully- operational) by July 1, 2022, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions by July 22, 2022. 4.3. Liquidated Damages: 4.3.1. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph Contract Times above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner $2,000 for each day that expires after the time specified herein for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 5. CONTRACT PRICE 5.1. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit. 6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.1. Submittal and Processing of Payments: Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions. 6.2. Progress Payments and Retainage: Owner will make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Application for Payment on the date of each month as established in the preconstruction conference during performance of the Work as provided herein. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.05 of the General Conditions or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided in the General Requirements. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 AGREEMENT JULY 2021 00 52 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 6.2.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine or Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions: 6.2.1.1. Ninety five percent of work completed (with the balance being retainage). 6.2.2. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner will pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts as Engineer will determine in accordance with Paragraph 15.01.C.6 of the General Conditions and less 100 percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion. 6.3. Final Payment: 6.3.1. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions, Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in Paragraph 15.06. 7. INTEREST 7.1. Monies not paid when due as provided in Article 15 of the General Conditions shall bear interest at the rate of one-half percent per month. 8. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 8.1. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the following representations: 8.1.1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. 8.1.2. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 8.1.3. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT AGREEMENT PW\DEN003\709275 00 52 13 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 8.1.4. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on 1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Contract Documents; and 3) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. 8.1.5. Based on the information and observations referred to above, Contractor does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 8.1.6. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 8.1.7. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor. 8.1.8. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1. Contents: 9.1.1. The Contract Documents that are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise) consist of the following: 9.1.1.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to , inclusive). 9.1.1.2. Performance bond (pages to , inclusive). 9.1.1.3. Payment bond (pages to , inclusive). 9.1.1.4. General Conditions (pages to , inclusive). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 AGREEMENT JULY 2021 00 52 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 9.1.1.5. Supplementary Conditions (pages to , inclusive). 9.1.1.6. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual. 9.1.1.7. Drawings consisting of 12 sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title: “Gaines Street Pump Station Liner Retrofit”. 9.1.1.8. Addenda (numbers to , inclusive). 9.1.2. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): 9.1.2.1. Contractor’s Bid (Section 00 41 13) (pages to , inclusive). 9.1.3. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: 9.1.3.1. Notice to Proceed (pages to , inclusive). 9.1.3.2. Work Change Directives. 9.1.3.3. Change Order(s). 9.2. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. 9.3. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 11.01 of the General Conditions. 10. MISCELLANEOUS 10.1. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. 10.2. Successors and Assigns: Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 10.3. Assignment of Contract: 10.3.1. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract shall be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, monies that may become due and monies that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT AGREEMENT PW\DEN003\709275 00 52 13 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment shall release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 10.3.2. Contractor’s Certifications: 10.3.3. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this paragraph: 10.3.3.1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in Contract execution; 10.3.3.2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract Price at artificial noncompetitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition; 10.3.3.3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, noncompetitive levels; and 10.3.3.4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. 10.4. Indemnity and Hold Harmless 10.4.1. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses, or suits, including attorney fees, arising out of or in connection with the performance of this Contract, except for injuries and damages caused by the sole negligence of the Owner. However, should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this Contract is subject to RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the Contractor and the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers, the Contractor’s liability hereunder shall be only to the extent of the Contractor’s negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 AGREEMENT JULY 2021 00 52 13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS provided herein constitutes the Contractor’s waiver of immunity under Industrial Insurance, Title 51 RCW, solely for the purposes of indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by the parties. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Contract. 10.5. Applicable Law; Venue This Contract shall be subject to, and the Contractor shall at all times comply with, all applicable state and local laws, regulations, rules and provisions of the Port Townsend Municipal Code and ordinances of the City of Port Townsend. Venue for any action hereunder shall be in Jefferson County. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT AGREEMENT PW\DEN003\709275 00 52 13 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed this ___________ day of _____________, 20__. City of Port Townsend By: John Mauro, City Manager Approved as to form: __________________________________ Heidi Greenwood, City Attorney CONTRACTOR: By: Name: ____________________________ Title: END OF SECTION Page 1 of 2 LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND (NOTE: CONTRACTOR MUST USE THIS FORM, NOT A SURETY COMPANY FORM. MUST BE ACCOMPAINED BY A POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR THE SURETY’S OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO SIGN) We the Undersigned _____________________________ as PRINCIPAL (Contractor) and ________________________________________, a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the state of __________________, and duly authorized to do surety business in the state of Washington and named on the current list of approved surety companies acceptable on federal bonds and conforming with the underwriting limitations as published in the Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner and which carries an "A" rating and is of the appropriate class for the bond amount as determined by Best's Rating System, as SURETY, hereby hold and firmly bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, unto CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND, as OBLIGEE, in the sum of ___________________________________ Dollars ($______________) in lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of that sum for the use and benefit of claimants as defined below. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas the PRINCIPAL entered into a contract with CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND dated ___________________, 20___, which contract is hereunto annexed and made a part hereof, for accomplishment of the all contract terms for the project described as follows: ___________________________________________________________________________________. This statutory payment bond shall become null and void, if and when the Principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns shall pay all persons in accordance with Titles 60.28, 39.08, and 39.12 RCW including all workers, laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, and materialmen, and all persons who shall supply such contractor or subcontractor with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work, and all taxes incurred on said Contract under Title 50 and 51 RCW and all taxes imposed on the Principal under Title 82 RCW; and if such payment obligations have not been fulfilled, this bond shall remain in force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: The above-named PRINCIPAL and SURETY hereby jointly and severally agree that every claimant, who has not been paid in full, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment in for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon. The OBLIGEE shall not be liable for the payment of any judgment, costs, expenses or attorneys' fees of any such suit. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that SURETY for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that all changes, extensions of time, alterations to the terms of the contract or to Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall be within the scope of the SURETY's undertaking on this bond, and SURETY does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the Work or to the Specifications. Any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the Work or to the Specifications shall automatically increase the obligation of the SURETY hereunder in a like amount, provided that the total of such increases shall not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the original amount of the obligation without the consent of the SURETY. This obligation shall continue to bind the PRINCIPAL and SURETY, notwithstanding successive payments made hereunder, until the full amount of the obligation is exhausted, or if the full amount of the obligation is not exhausted and no claim is pending resolution, until such time as no further claims can be made pursuant to law with regard to the above-described project. Page 2 of 2 SURETY shall indemnify, defend, and protect the CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the CONTRACTOR (or any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the CONTRACTOR) to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material persons, or any other person who provides supplies or provisions for carrying out the work. If more than one SURETY is on this bond, each SURETY hereby agrees that it is jointly and severally liable for all obligations of this bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this _______ day of _______________________, 20___. SURETY CONTRACTOR By: ________________________________ By*: _____________________________ Title: _______________________________ Title: ____________________________ Street Address _______________________ Street Address _____________________ ____________________________________ __________________________________ Phone Number ________________________ Phone Number ______________________ * Must be signed by president or vice-president of Contractor. [FORM REVISED 10/2017] PERFORMANCE BOND to City of Port Townsend, WA Bond No. The City of Port Townsend, Washington, has awarded to ______________________ (Principal), a contract for the construction of the project designated as Gaines Street Pump Station Liner Retrofit, in Port Townsend, Washington, and said Principal is required to furnish a bond for performance of all obligations under the Contract. The Principal, and _____________ (Surety), a corporation, organized under the laws of the State of ___________ and licensed to do business in the State of Washington as surety and named in the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable in Federal Bonds" as published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Dept., are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City in the sum of __________US Dollars ($_______________________) Total Contract Amount, subject to the provisions herein. This statutory performance bond shall become null and void, if and when the Principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns shall well and faithfully perform all of the Principal's obligations under the Contract and fulfill all the terms and conditions of all duly authorized modifications, additions, and changes to said Contract that may hereafter be made, at the time and in the manner therein specified; and if such performance obligations have not been fulfilled, this bond shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety for value received agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, the specifications accompanying the Contract, or to the work to be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or the work performed. The Surety agrees that modifications and changes to the terms and conditions of the Contract that increase the total amount to be paid the Principal shall automatically increase the obligation of the Surety on this bond and notice to Surety is not required for such increased obligation. This bond may be executed in two (2) original counterparts, and shall be signed by the parties' duly authorized officers. This bond will only be accepted if it is accompanied by a fully executed and original power of attorney for the officer executing on behalf of the surety. PRINCIPAL SURETY _______________________________________ _____________________________________ Principal Signature Date Surety Signature Date _______________________________________ ______________________________________ Printed Name Printed Name _______________________________________ ______________________________________ Title Title Name, address, and telephone of local office/agent of Surety Company is: ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (EJCDC® C-520, Stipulated Sum, or C-525, Cost-Plus, 2013 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Copyright © 2013: National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.01 Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 Terminology ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................................. 5 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance .................................................................................................. 5 2.02 Copies of Documents ........................................................................................................................................ 5 2.03 Before Starting Construction ............................................................................................................................ 5 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ....................................................... 5 2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ........................................................................................................................ 6 2.06 Electronic Transmittals .................................................................................................................................... 6 ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE ................................................................................... 6 3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................................................. 6 3.02 Reference Standards ......................................................................................................................................... 6 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ........................................................................................................... 7 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ........................................................................................................ 7 3.05 Reuse of Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK ............................................................................... 8 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed .................................................................................... 8 4.02 Starting the Work .............................................................................................................................................. 8 4.03 Reference Points ............................................................................................................................................... 8 4.04 Progress Schedule ............................................................................................................................................ 8 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ...................................................................................................................... 9 ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 9 5.01 Availability of Lands ......................................................................................................................................... 9 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................................... 10 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .............................................................................................................. 10 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ................................................................................................. 11 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................................... 12 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ................................................................................................. 13 ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE ........................................................................................................................... 15 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ...................................................................................................... 15 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ...................................................................................................................... 15 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................................... 16 6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................................... 18 6.05 Property Insurance ......................................................................................................................................... 18 6.06 Waiver of Rights ............................................................................................................................................. 20 6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds .............................................................................. 20 ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ....................................................................................................... 21 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ................................................................................................................... 21 7.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................................... 21 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ............................................................................................................... 21 7.04 “Or Equals” ................................................................................................................................................... 21 7.05 Substitutes ....................................................................................................................................................... 22 7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ....................................................................................... 23 7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ............................................................................................................................... 24 7.08 Permits ............................................................................................................................................................ 25 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii 7.09 Taxes ............................................................................................................................................................... 25 7.10 Laws and Regulations ..................................................................................................................................... 25 7.11 Record Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 26 7.12 Safety and Protection ...................................................................................................................................... 26 7.13 Safety Representative ...................................................................................................................................... 26 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ................................................................................................................. 27 7.15 Emergencies .................................................................................................................................................... 27 7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals ............................................................................................ 27 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ............................................................................................ 29 7.18 Indemnification ............................................................................................................................................... 29 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................................... 30 ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ....................................................................................................................... 30 8.01 Other Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 30 8.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................................... 31 8.03 Legal Relationships ........................................................................................................................................ 31 ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................................... 32 9.01 Communications to Contractor ...................................................................................................................... 32 9.02 Replacement of Engineer ................................................................................................................................ 32 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................................... 32 9.04 Pay When Due ................................................................................................................................................ 32 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .................................................................................... 32 9.06 Insurance ........................................................................................................................................................ 32 9.07 Change Orders................................................................................................................................................ 32 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ................................................................................................................... 32 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 32 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ......................................................................................... 32 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .............................................................................................................. 32 9.12 Safety Programs .............................................................................................................................................. 32 ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 32 10.01 Owner’s Representative .................................................................................................................................. 32 10.02 Visits to Site .................................................................................................................................................... 33 10.03 Project Representative .................................................................................................................................... 33 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ................................................................................................................................ 33 10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .............................................................................................. 33 10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work ............................................................................................................... 33 10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ............................................ 33 10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .............................................................................. 33 10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ................................................................................................................... 34 ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK ......................................... 34 11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents....................................................................................... 34 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................................ 35 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................................................ 35 11.04 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................................... 35 11.05 Change of Contract Times .............................................................................................................................. 36 11.06 Change Proposals ........................................................................................................................................... 36 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ........................................................................................................................... 37 11.08 Notification to Surety ...................................................................................................................................... 37 ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS ........................................................................................................................................................ 37 12.01 Claims ............................................................................................................................................................. 37 ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK ............................................................... 38 13.01 Cost of the Work ............................................................................................................................................. 38 13.02 Allowances ...................................................................................................................................................... 40 13.03 Unit Price Work .............................................................................................................................................. 40 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 41 14.01 Access to Work ................................................................................................................................................ 41 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ................................................................................................................... 41 14.03 Defective Work................................................................................................................................................ 42 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ........................................................................................................................ 42 14.05 Uncovering Work ............................................................................................................................................ 42 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .............................................................................................................................. 43 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .............................................................................................................. 43 ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD ..................... 43 15.01 Progress Payments ......................................................................................................................................... 43 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ....................................................................................................................... 46 15.03 Substantial Completion ................................................................................................................................... 46 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy .............................................................................................................................. 47 15.05 Final Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 47 15.06 Final Payment ................................................................................................................................................. 47 15.07 Waiver of Claims ............................................................................................................................................ 48 15.08 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................................... 48 ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ...................................................................................... 49 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ............................................................................................................................. 49 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ................................................................................................................... 49 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience........................................................................................................ 50 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ....................................................................................................... 50 ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES ........................................................................................................ 51 17.01 Methods and Procedures ................................................................................................................................ 51 ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS ...................................................................................................................................... 51 18.01 Giving Notice .................................................................................................................................................. 51 18.02 Computation of Times ..................................................................................................................................... 51 18.03 Cumulative Remedies ...................................................................................................................................... 51 18.04 Limitation of Damages ................................................................................................................................... 51 18.05 No Waiver ....................................................................................................................................................... 51 18.06 Survival of Obligations ................................................................................................................................... 51 18.07 Controlling Law .............................................................................................................................................. 52 18.08 Headings ......................................................................................................................................................... 52 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 52 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set- off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 52 §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. . Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Hazardous Environmental Condition— The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for, procuring and constructing EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 52 the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals and the performance of related construction activities. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 52 available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 52 The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6. C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract; a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 52 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a secure Project website. B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols. DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version shall govern. D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral. E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard specification, manual, reference EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 52 standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies: Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 52 the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim. C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date. 4.03 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 52 Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes; abnormal weather conditions; acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and acts of war or terrorism. D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5. E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 52 C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 52 with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either: is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 52 be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and, c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site; c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; determine the extent, if any, to EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 52 which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part. E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question; b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 52 any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.H shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 52 hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in- fact signed the accompanying bond. C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts. D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements above. E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A- VII or better. C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 52 endorsements required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance. F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set-off against payment, and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract. 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for: claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s compensation states). Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against: claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom. C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 52 commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: Products and completed operations coverage: a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18. Broad form property damage coverage. Severability of interest. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage. Personal injury coverage. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their equivalent. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04, “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis. E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to industry-standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every one of the underlying policies. F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs, as a result of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion. G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non-contributory basis. Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements. H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such Subcontractor. I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall: include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 52 be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other insured under the policy. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies, and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies. 6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties. 6.05 Property Insurance A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be referred to as “insureds.” be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 52 cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects). extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier). extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. not include a co-insurance clause. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. include performance/hot testing and start-up. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is complete. B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured. C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible. D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance. E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense. F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what amount. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 52 6.06 Waiver of Rights A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for: loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them. D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. 6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 52 C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by Change Order, if needed. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld. 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 7.04 “Or Equals” A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 52 strength, and design characteristics; it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and it is not objectionable to Owner. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense. C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or- equal”, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05. 7.05 Substitutes A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. b. will state: the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times, EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 52 whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal. 7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so. C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection. D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 52 acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days. E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement. G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work. K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed herein. L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier. O. Nothing in the Contract Documents: shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 52 knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 7.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 7.09 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 7.10 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 52 such notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim. 7.11 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer. 7.12 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work. D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 7.13 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 52 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements: Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. Shop Drawings: a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. Samples: a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 52 intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Specifications. D. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A and B. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample, or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4. E. Resubmittal Procedures: Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 52 Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: observations by Engineer; recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; any inspection, test, or approval by others; or any correction of defective Work by Owner. D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract. 7.18 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 52 agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer. OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 52 work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 8.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and the extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this paragraph. C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor. D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 52 members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference. OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 9.02 Replacement of Engineer A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 9.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6. 9.07 Change Orders A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B. 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work). 9.12 Safety Programs A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed. B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 52 10.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. 10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set forth in Paragraph 7.16. B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in Paragraph 7.19. C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11. D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. 10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03. 10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith. 10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 34 of 52 B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any. 10.09 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which Engineer has been informed. AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. Change Orders: a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Contractor EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 52 believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and 11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the amount (fee EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 52 plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole, approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12. B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed. 11.08 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article: Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals; Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; and Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters. B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer. D. Mediation: At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 52 agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes. G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price. COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall include only the following items: Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 52 the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 52 Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C. E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 13.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 13.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 52 B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if: the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 52 prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 43 of 52 or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 44 of 52 B. Applications for Payments: At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. C. Review of Applications: Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 45 of 52 b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D. Payment Becomes Due: Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set- offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. E. Reductions in Payment by Owner: In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement; b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 52 i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred; j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work; k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 52 permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work. E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above. F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through E for that part of the Work. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance. 15.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A. Application for Payment: After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 52 c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment. d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance: If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment. D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 49 of 52 Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas; correct such defective Work; if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to: declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that the Contract is terminated; and EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 50 of 52 enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure. E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D. 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 51 of 52 amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article: A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full; and Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made. B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner or Contractor may: elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction. MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the sender of the notice. 18.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 18.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 18.04 Limitation of Damages A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 18.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract. 18.06 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 52 of 52 termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 18.07 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 18.08 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix “SC” added thereto. SC-1.01. Renumber Paragraph 1.01.A.38 to 1.01.A.38.a, and add the following new paragraphs: 1.01.A.38.b. Specialist—The term Specialist refers to a person, partnership, firm, or corporation of established reputation (or if newly organized, whose personnel have previously established a reputation in the same field), which is regularly engaged in, and which maintains a regular force of workers skilled in either (as applicable) manufacturing or fabricating items required by the Contract Documents, or otherwise performing Work required by the Contract Documents. Where the Specifications require the installation by a Specialist, that term shall also be deemed to mean either the manufacturer of the item, a person, partnership, firm, or corporation licensed by the manufacturer, or a person, partnership, firm, or corporation who will perform the Work under the manufacturer’s direct supervision. SC-1.01. Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 1.01.A.40: Substantial Completion is further defined as (i) that degree of completion of the Project’s operating facilities or systems sufficient to provide Owner the full time, uninterrupted, and continuous beneficial operation of the Work; and (ii) required functional, performance and acceptance, or startup testing has been successfully demonstrated for components, devices, equipment, and instrumentation and control to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications. SC-2.01 Delete Paragraph 2.01.B. and Paragraph 2.01.C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place: 2.01.B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner copies of the policies of insurance (including all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) required to be provided by Contractor in Article 6. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW\DEN003\709275 00 73 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. 2.01.C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt from Contractor of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor copies of the policies of insurance to be provided by Owner under Article 6 (if any). Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. SC-2.02. Delete Paragraph 2.02.A. in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place: 2.02.A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to three hard copies of conformed Contract Documents incorporating and integrating all Addenda and any amendments negotiated prior to the Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement) and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies of the conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. SC-3.01. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 3.01.E: 3.01.F. Sections of Division 01, General Requirements, govern the execution of the Work of all sections of the Specifications. SC-4.03. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 4.03.A: 4.03.B. In accordance with Washington Administrative Code 332-120-030, Contractor shall search records and physical area of Site, including road or street resurfacing projects, for the purpose of locating and referencing any known or existing survey monuments. 4.03.C. In accordance with Washington Administration Code WAC 332-120-030, no survey monument shall be removed or destroyed before a permit is obtained from Washington’s Department of Natural Resources. 4.03.D. After completion of the activity that caused the removal or destruction of the monument, if applicable, Contractor shall conduct remonumentation activities and file survey monumentation records in accordance with Washington Administrative Code 332-120-060. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SC-5.03. Delete Paragraphs 5.03.A and 5.03.B in their entirety and insert the following in their place: 5.03.A. There may be reports of explorations or tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site, or drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, but they are not thought to be relevant for the Project. Contractor should request such information, if deemed relevant, from the Owner. 5.03.B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 5.03.B.1. The completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 5.03.B.2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 5.03.B.3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. SC-5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions: 5.04.D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 5.04.D.1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: 5.04.D.1.a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph SC-5.04.A; 5.04.D.1.b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions; and, CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW\DEN003\709275 00 73 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 5.04.D.1.c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. 5.04.D.2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: 5.04.D.2.a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or 5.04.D.2.b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or 5.04.D.3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 5.04.D.4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. SC-6.01. Delete the first three sentences in Paragraph 6.01.A in their entirety and insert the following in their place: Contractor shall furnish a combined performance and payment bond in the full amount of the Agreement, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall adhere to, at a minimum, the provisions included in the bond forms as made a part of the Contract, and shall remain in effect at least until 1 year after the final payment becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. SC-6.02. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.A: 6.02.A.1. Surety and insurance companies from which the bonds and insurance for this Project are purchased shall have an A.M. Best’s rating of no less than A, in addition to other requirements specified herein. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SC-6.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 6.03.A.4: 6.03.A.5. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: 6.03.A.5.a. Workers’ Compensation and related coverages under Paragraph 6.03.A.1 and Paragraph 6.03.A.3 of the General Conditions: 6.03.A.5.a.1. State: Statutory. 6.03.A.5.a.2. Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory. 6.03.A.5.a.4. Jones Act coverage, if applicable: Bodily Injury by Accident, Each Accident: $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, Aggregate: $500,000 6.03.A.5.a.5. Employer’s Liability: Bodily Injury, Each Accident: $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, Each Employee: $500,000 Bodily Injury/Disease Aggregate: $500,000 For work performed in monopolistic states, stop-gap liability coverage shall be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of: $500,000 Foreign Voluntary Worker Compensation: Statutory SC-6.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 6.03.C.8: 6.03.C.9. Contractor’s General Liability under Paragraph 6.03.B. and Paragraph 6.03.C of the General Conditions which shall eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of Contractor: 6.03.C.9.a. General Aggregate $2,000,000 6.03.C.9.b. Products - Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW\DEN003\709275 00 73 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 6.03.C.9.c. Personal and Advertising Injury (per person/Organization) $2,000,000 60.3.C.9.d. Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $2,000,000 6.03.C.9.e. Property Damage liability insurance will provide Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverages where applicable. SC-6.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 6.03.D: 6.03.D.1. Contractor’s Automobile Liability 6.03.D.1.a. Bodily Injury: Each Person $500,000 Each Accident $500,000 6.03.D.1.b. Property Damage: Each Accident $500,000 6.03.D.1.a. Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000 SC-6.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 6.03.E: 6.03.E.1. Excess or Umbrella Liability: a) General Aggregate $5,000,000 b) Each Occurrence $5,000,000 SC-6.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 6.03.F: 6.03.F.1. Pollution Liability: a) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 b) General Aggregate $1,000,000 If box is checked, Contractor is not required to provide Contractor’s Pollution Liability insurance under this Contract. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SC-6.03. Add the following language after Paragraph 6.03.G: 6.03.G.1. Include the following parties or entities as additional insured: 6.03.G.1.a. City of Port Townsend Public Works Department, 250 Madison St, Suite 2R, Port Townsend, WA 98368. 6.03.G.1.b. Jacobs, 1100 112th Ave NE, Suite 500, Bellevue, WA 98004. SC-6.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 6.03.H: 6.03.H.1 Contractor’s Professional Liability: a) Each Claim $1,000,000 b) Annual Aggregate $1,000,000 SC-6.05. Insert the following paragraph after 6.05.A.1: 6.05.A.1.a. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued; and 6.05.A.1.b. comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05.A of the General Conditions. SC-6.05. Add the following to the list of items in Paragraph 6.05.A, as numbered items: 6.05.A.14. include for the benefit of Owner loss of profits and soft cost coverage including, without limitation, fixed expenses and debt service for a minimum of 12 months with a maximum deductible of 30 days, plus attorney’s fees and engineering or other consultants’ fees, if not otherwise covered; 6.05.A.15. Property insurance furnished under this Contract shall have deductibles no greater than $10,000 for direct physical loss in any one occurrence for sublimits except for earthquake, which shall have a maximum deductible of $25,000. Include by express endorsement coverage of damage to Contractor’s equipment. SC-7.02. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 7.02.B: 7.02.B.1. Contractor and Subcontractor regular working hours consist of up to 10 working hours within an 11-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., on a regularly scheduled basis, excluding Sundays and holidays. Overtime work is work in excess of 40 hours per week. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW\DEN003\709275 00 73 00 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SC-7.06. Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 7.06.A: Contractor shall perform a minimum of 50 percent of the onsite labor with its own employees. SC-7.08. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.08.A: 7.08.B. The Owner will procure the shoreline permit and all other environmental building and land use permits. Contractor shall be responsible for applicable code- required construction permits. SC-7.10. Add the following new paragraph(s) immediately after Paragraph 7.10.C: 7.10.D. While not intended to be inclusive of all Laws or Regulations for which Contractor may be responsible under Paragraph 7.10, the following Laws or Regulations are included as mandated by statute or for the convenience of Contractor: 7.10.D.1. Prevailing Wages: 7.10.D.1.a. Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing rate of wages in accordance with Washington RCW 39.12.020. Certificates of wage payments by Contractor shall be submitted to the Department of Labor, with a copy to Owner, in accordance with RCW 39.12.040 and shall pay all fees associated therewith. Wage certification forms shall be provided by Contractor. 7.10.D.1.b. No worker, laborer, or mechanic employed in the performance of any part of this Agreement shall be paid less than the “prevailing rate of wage” as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. The schedule of the prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities where this Agreement will be performed is by reference made a part of this Agreement as though fully set forth herein. 7.10.D.1.c. In case a dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and management representatives, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State, and its decision therein shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060. 7.10.D.1.d. Owner does not guarantee that labor can be procured for the minimum wages in the wage scale. The rates of wages listed are minimum only, below which Contractor cannot pay, and they do not CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS constitute a representation that labor can be procured for the minimum listed. Contractor shall ascertain the wages above the minimum set forth that may have to be paid. SC-7.18. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.18.C: 7.18.D. For suits, actions, legal or administrative proceedings, Claims, demands, damages, losses, penalties, fines, costs, and expenses caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of Owner and Engineer, or Owner’s or Engineer’s agents or employees, and Contractor or Contractor’s agents or employees, in situations where liability for damages arises from Claims of bodily injury to persons or damage to property, the preceding indemnity provision shall be valid and enforceable only to the extent of Contractor’s negligence. 7.18.E. Contractor acknowledges that by entering into a Contract with Owner, Contractor has mutually negotiated the above indemnity provision with Owner. 7.18.F. Contractor’s indemnity and defense obligations shall survive the termination or completion of the Work and remain in full force and effect until satisfied in full. SC-9.11. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 9.11.A: 9.11.B. On request of Contractor, prior to the execution of any Change Order involving a significant increase in the Contract Price, Owner will furnish to Contractor reasonable evidence that adequate financial arrangements have been made by Owner to enable Owner to fulfill the increased financial obligations to be undertaken by Owner as a result of such Change Order. SC-10.08. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 10.08.E: 10.08.F. Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others on the Project, or their sureties, shall maintain no direct action against Engineer, its officers, employees, affiliated corporations, and subcontractors, for any Claim arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from the engineering services performed. Only the Owner will be the beneficiary of any undertaking by Engineer. SC-11.04. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 11.04.C: 11.04.D. In the event Contractor submits request for additional compensation as a result of a change or differing Site conditions, or as a result of delays, acceleration, or loss of productivity, Owner reserves right, upon written request, to audit and inspect Contractor’s books and records relating to the Project. Upon written request for an audit, Contractor shall make its books and records available within 14 days of request. Owner shall specifically designate identity of auditor. As part of audit, Contractor shall make available its books and records relating to the Project, CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW\DEN003\709275 00 73 00 - 10 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS including but not limited to Bidding Documents, cost reports, payroll records, material invoices, subcontracts, purchase orders, daily timesheets, and daily diaries. Audit shall be limited to those cost items which are sought by Contractor in a change order or claim submission to Owner. SC-13.01. Delete Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 13.01.B.5.c. Construction Equipment and Machinery: 13.01.B.5.c.(1) Rentals of construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. Such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 13.01.B.5.c.(2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the Rental Rate Blue Book published by Equipment Watch. An hourly rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will include all operating costs. Costs will include the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The cost of such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, shall cease to accrue when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work. Equipment or machinery with a value of less than $1,000 will be considered small tools. SC-14.02. Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 14.02.D: Tests required by Contract Documents to be performed by Contractor that require test certificates be submitted to Owner or Engineer for acceptance shall be made by an independent testing laboratory or agency licensed or certified in accordance with Laws and Regulations and applicable state and local statutes. In the event state license or certification is not required, testing laboratories or agencies shall meet the following applicable requirements: 14.02.D.6. Basic requirements of ASTM E329, “Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection” as applicable. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 14.02.D.7. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy, traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology or accepted values of natural physical constants. SC-15.01. Add the following language at the beginning of Paragraph 15.01.B.1: Prior to submitting initial payment invoice, Contractor and its Subcontractors shall provide Owner with “Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages” as required by RCW 39.12.040. SC-15.01. Delete Paragraph 15.01.D.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 15.01.D.1. Thirty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.01.E.) become due and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. SC-15.06. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 15.06.A.3: 15.06.A.4. On contracts for public works, final payment of the retained percentage will not be made until after Contractor has filed with Owner the affidavit required by RCW 39.12.040 certifying Contractor and its Subcontractors have paid not less than the prevailing rate of wages. SC-15.06. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 15.06.B.1: 15.06.B.2. Upon Owner’s receipt of (i) Engineer’s written recommendation of payment with Contractor’s Final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and (ii) Engineer’s written notice that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09, Owner will notify the Department of Revenue of the completion of the Work under these Contract Documents. Provided the Department of Revenue certifies there are no taxes or penalties due and owing from Contractor, and there are no other known Claims or Liens against the retained funds, Owner will make payment to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 subject to the provisions of RCW 60.28.010. In the event unsatisfied Claims or Liens for taxes, material, labor, and other services are known to exist, an amount will be further withheld from the retainage sufficient to satisfy the settlement of such Claims and Liens, including attorney’s fees incurred, and remainder will be released from escrow, or released from retained funds and paid to Contractor. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW\DEN003\709275 00 73 00 - 12 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SC-17.02. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01. SC-17.02 Arbitration SC-17.02.A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be decided by arbitration in accordance with the rules of Jefferson County, subject to the conditions and limitations of this paragraph. This agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. SC-17.02.B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitrator or arbitration provider, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in this Article, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. The demand for arbitration should include specific reference to Paragraph SC-17.02.D below. SC-17.02.C. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer, and Engineer’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: SC-17.02.C.1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; and SC-17.02.C.2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings. SC-17.02.D. The award rendered by the arbitrator(s) shall be consistent with the agreement of the parties, in writing, and include a concise breakdown of the award, and a written explanation of the award specifically citing the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. SC-17.02.E. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS JULY 2021 00 73 00 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SC-17.02.F. The fees and expenses of the arbitrators and any arbitration service shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor. 17.02.F. The fees and expenses of the arbitrators and any arbitration service shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor. SC-17.03. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02: SC-17.03 Attorneys’ Fees: For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, taking into account the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result. END OF SECTION PART 3 SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUMMARY OF WORK JULY 2021 01 11 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The completed Work will provide Owner with a fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) wetwell liner installed inside the existing concrete wetwell with a new H-20-rated top slab and access hatch and includes all new internal components: three submersible pumps with discharge elbow/guide rail system, discharge piping, and two new level sensing elements. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PAYMENT PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 29 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Schedule of Values: Submit on Contractor’s standard form. 2. Application for Payment. 3. Final Application for Payment. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prepare a separate Schedule of Values for each schedule of the Work under the Agreement. B. Upon request of Engineer, provide documentation to support the accuracy of the Schedule of Values. C. Lump Sum Work: 1. Reflect specified allowances and alternates, as applicable. 2. List bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization, preliminary and detailed progress schedule preparation, equipment testing, facility startup, and contract closeout separately. a. Mobilization includes, at minimum, items identified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. D. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. E. Summation of the complete Schedule of Values representing all the Work shall equal the Contract Price. 1.03 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Transmittal Summary Form: Attach one Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. B. First Application for Payment shall not be submitted until all submittals have been reviewed and approved. No payment by Owner to Contractor shall be made until all submittals have been reviewed and approved by Engineer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PAYMENT PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 29 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Use detailed Application for Payment Form suitable to Engineer. D. Include accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of lump sum Work and the unit price breakdown for the Work to be paid on a unit priced basis. E. Include separate line item for each Change Order and Work Change Directive executed prior to date of submission. Provide further breakdown of such as requested by Engineer. F. Preparation: 1. Round values to nearest dollar. 2. Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary Form and detailed Application for Payment Form(s) for each schedule as applicable, a listing of materials on hand for each schedule as applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by Engineer. 1.04 PAYMENT A. Payment for all Lump Sum Work shown or specified in Contract Documents is included in the Contract Price. Payment will be based on a percentage complete basis for each line item of the accepted Schedule of Values. 1.05 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS A. Payment will not be made for following: 1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material. 2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under Contract Documents. 3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by reason of failure of Contractor to conform to provisions of Contract Documents. 4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle. 5. Defective Work not accepted by Owner. 6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work. 1.06 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Partial Payment: No partial payments will be made for materials and equipment delivered or stored unless Shop Drawings and preliminary operation and maintenance data is acceptable to Engineer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PAYMENT PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 29 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Final Payment: Will be made only for products incorporated in Work; remaining products, for which partial payments have been made, shall revert to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those items will be deducted from final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PROJECT COORDINATION JULY 2021 01 31 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational: 1. Photographs: a. Digital Images: Submit one copy of digital storage device containing images within 10 days of being taken. Each image is to have a minimum file size of 1.4 Mb (1,400 Kb) so viewed resolution is high quality. The production of larger file sizes with higher resolution is encouraged. 1.02 RELATED WORK AT SITE A. General: 1. There is no other work that is either directly or indirectly related to scheduled performance of the Work under these Contract Documents, listed henceforth, anticipated to be performed at Site by others. 2. Coordinate the Work of these Contract Documents with work of others as specified in General Conditions. 3. Include sequencing constraints specified herein as a part of Progress Schedule. B. Power: 1. Agency: PUD No. 1 of Jefferson County. C. Applications Software Development: There are no modifications anticipated to pump station controls or software programming. 1.03 UTILITY NOTIFICATION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with various utilities within Project limits. Notify applicable utilities prior to commencing Work, if damage occurs, or if conflicts or emergencies arise during the Work. 1. Electricity Company: PUD No. 1 of Jefferson County. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PROJECT COORDINATION PW\DEN003\709275 01 31 13 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.04 PROJECT MILESTONES A. General: Include the Milestones specified herein as a part of the Progress Schedule required under Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation. B. Project Milestones: 1. Following are milestones in the sequence of Work anticipated: a. Initial submittal of new pump station package. b. Mobilization to Project Site. c. Bypass pumping installed and functional. d. Demolition work complete. e. Installation complete. f. Testing and commissioning complete. g. Substantial Completion. h. Final Completion. 1.05 WORK ON SITE A. Contractor’s occupation of the Project Site shall be minimized because the Project Site and the streets connecting to the Project Site are heavily used. Contractor’s occupation of the Site from “Mobilization to Project Site” as identified in the Project Milestones to “Substantial Completion” shall be limited to 60 consecutive calendar days. Note that Owner will close connecting streets to Project Site on the day Contractor mobilizes to the Site. Contractor’s schedule for Mobilizing to the Project Site shall be fixed and unchanged, with concurrence from Owner, at least 40 days prior to the first day the Site is to be occupied. 1.06 FACILITY OPERATIONS A. Continuous operation of Owner’s facilities is of critical importance. Schedule and conduct activities to enable existing facilities to operate continuously, unless otherwise specified. B. Perform Work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, and as required to prevent interruption of Owner’s operations. C. When necessary, plan, design, and provide various temporary services, utilities, connections, temporary piping and heating, access, and similar items to maintain continuous operations of Owner’s facility. D. Do not close lines, open or close valves, or take other action which would affect the operation of existing systems, except as specifically required by the CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PROJECT COORDINATION JULY 2021 01 31 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Contract Documents and after authorization by Owner. Such authorization will be considered within 48 hours after receipt of Contractor’s written request. E. Install and maintain bypass facilities and temporary connections required to maintain Owner’s Gaines Street Pump Station sewage pumping capacity during construction. Sequences other than those specified will be considered upon written request to Owner, provided they afford equivalent continuity of operations. F. Do not proceed with Work affecting a facility’s operation without obtaining Owner’s advance approval of the need for and duration of such Work. G. Relocation of Existing Facilities: 1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work will be necessary. 2. Provide relocation of existing Underground Facilities, including piping, utilities, equipment, electrical conduit wiring, and other necessary items. 3. Use only new materials for relocated facility. Match materials of existing facility, unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Perform relocations to minimize downtime of existing facilities. 1.07 ADJACENT FACILITIES AND PROPERTIES A. Examination: 1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, Contractor, Engineer, and Owner shall make a thorough examination of pre-existing conditions including existing buildings, structures, and other improvements in vicinity of Work, as applicable, which could be damaged by construction operations. 2. Periodic reexamination shall be jointly performed to include, but not limited to, cracks in structures, settlement, leakage, and similar conditions. B. Documentation: 1. Record and submit documentation of observations made on examination inspections in accordance with Article Construction Photographs. 2. Such documentation shall be used as indisputable evidence in ascertaining whether and to what extent damage occurred as a result of Contractor’s operations, and is for the protection of adjacent property owners, Contractor, and Owner. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PROJECT COORDINATION PW\DEN003\709275 01 31 13 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Photographically document all phases of the Project including preconstruction, construction progress, and post-construction. B. Preconstruction and Post-Construction: 1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, and again upon issuance of Substantial Completion, take a minimum of 48 photographs of Site and property adjacent to perimeter of Site. 2. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and outside the Site. 3. Format: Digital, minimum resolution of 1680 by 2240 pixels and 24-bit, millions of color. C. Construction Progress Photos: 1. Photographically demonstrate progress of construction, showing every aspect of Site and adjacent properties as well as interior and exterior of new or impacted structures. 2. Weekly: Take 48 photographs using digital, minimum resolution of 1680 by 2240 pixels and 24-bit, millions of color. D. Documentation: 1. Digital Images: Electronic image shall have date taken embedded into image. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGE OF MATERIALS A. Materials to be salvaged include: 1. Three submersible pumps. 2. Two level elements: ultrasonic and pressure transducer. B. Salvage materials for Owner’s use. 1. Remove material with extreme care so as not to damage for future use. 2. Promptly remove salvaged materials from Work area. 3. Store materials where instructed by Owner. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PROJECT COORDINATION JULY 2021 01 31 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Meet with Owner prior to starting to dismantle equipment or piping designated to be salvaged. Owner will indicate locations where equipment is to be disconnected. D. Provide new or repair damaged equipment or material specified or indicated to be salvaged. Clean and protect equipment from dust, dirt, natural elements, and store as directed. 3.02 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING A. Cut, fit, adjust, or patch Work and work of others, including excavation and backfill as required, to make Work complete. B. Obtain prior written authorization of Owner before commencing Work to cut or otherwise alter: 1. Concrete wet well. 2. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of pump station. C. Refinish surfaces to provide an even finish. 1. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. 2. Refinish entire assemblies. 3. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no transition between existing work and the Work is evident in finished surfaces. D. Restore existing work, Underground Facilities, and surfaces that are to remain in completed Work including concrete-embedded piping, conduit, and other utilities as specified and as shown on Drawings. E. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified for new Work of similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of manufacturer or appropriate trade association. F. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces and fill voids. G. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by Owner or Engineer. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION JULY 2021 01 32 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Submit at least 7 days prior to preconstruction conference. 2. Detailed Progress Schedule: a. Submit initial Detailed Progress Schedule within 60 days after Effective Date of the Agreement. b. Submit an Updated Progress Schedule at each update, in accordance with Article Detailed Progress Schedule. 3. Submit with Each Progress Schedule Submission: a. Contractor’s certification that Progress Schedule submission is actual schedule being used for execution of the Work. b. Progress Schedule: One legible copy and one electronically in PDF format. c. Narrative Progress Report: Same number of copies as specified for Progress Schedule. 4. Prior to final payment, submit a final Updated Progress Schedule. 1.02 PRELIMINARY PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. In addition to basic requirements outlined in General Conditions, show a detailed schedule, beginning with Notice to Proceed and continuing through Final Completion. B. Show activities including, but not limited to the following: 1. Notice to Proceed. 2. Site visit to field-verify dimensions and requirements for implementation into design of FRP wet well and appurtenances. 3. Permits. 4. Submittals, with review time. Contractor may use Schedule of Submittals specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 5. Early procurement activities for long lead equipment and materials. 6. Mobilization. 7. Initial Site work. 8. Earthwork. 9. Specified Work sequences and construction constraints. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PW\DEN003\709275 01 32 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 10. Contract Milestone and Completion Dates. 11. Owner-furnished products delivery dates or ranges of dates. 12. Major structural, mechanical, equipment, electrical, and instrumentation and control Work. 13. System startup summary. 14. Project close-out summary. 15. Demobilization summary. C. Update Preliminary Progress Schedule monthly as part of progress payment process. Failure to do so may result in the Owner withholding all or part of the monthly progress payment until the Preliminary Progress Schedule is updated in a manner acceptable to Engineer. D. Format: In accordance with Article Progress Schedule—Bar Chart. 1.03 DETAILED PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. In addition to requirements of General Conditions, submit Detailed Progress Schedule beginning with Notice to Proceed and continuing through Final Completion. Update Detailed Progress Schedule monthly. An updated Detailed Progress Schedule is a requirement to enable processing by Owner of monthly progress payments. B. Show the duration and sequences of activities required for complete performance of the Work reflecting means and methods chosen by Contractor. C. When accepted by Engineer, Detailed Progress Schedule will replace Preliminary Progress Schedule and become Baseline Schedule. Subsequent revisions will be considered as Updated Progress Schedules. D. Format: In accordance with Article Progress Schedule—Bar Chart. E. Update monthly to reflect actual progress and occurrences to date, including weather delays. 1.04 PROGRESS SCHEDULE—BAR CHART A. General: Comprehensive bar chart schedule, generally as outlined in Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) 580, “Construction Project Planning and Scheduling Guidelines.” If a conflict occurs between the AGC publication and this specification, this specification shall govern. Additionally, clearly identify the critical path and all associated critical path activities on the initial preliminary schedule as well as all later, updated schedules. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION JULY 2021 01 32 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Format: 1. Unless otherwise approved, white paper, 11-inch by 17-inch sheet size. 2. Title Block: Show name of Project and Owner, date submitted, revision or update number, and name of scheduler. 3. Identify horizontally, across the top of the schedule, the time frame by year, month, and day. 4. Identify each activity with a unique number and a brief description of the Work associated with that activity. 5. Legend: Describe standard and special symbols used. C. Contents: Identify, in chronological order, those activities reasonably required to complete the Work, including as applicable, but not limited to: 1. Obtaining permits, submittals for early product procurement, and long lead time items. 2. Technical submittals, including PE-stamped design submittals. 3. Mobilization and other preliminary activities. 4. Initial Site work. 5. Specified Work sequences, constraints, and Milestones, including Substantial Completion date(s). 6. Subcontract Work. 7. Major equipment design, fabrication, factory testing, and delivery dates. 8. Sitework. 9. Concrete Work. 10. Structural Work. 11. Conveying systems Work. 12. Equipment Work. 13. Mechanical Work. 14. Electrical Work. 15. Instrumentation and control Work. 16. Other important Work. 17. Equipment and system startup and test activities. 18. Project closeout and cleanup. 19. Demobilization. 1.05 PROGRESS OF THE WORK A. Updated Progress Schedule shall reflect: 1. Progress of Work to within 5 working days prior to submission. 2. Approved changes in Work scope and activities modified since submission. 3. Delays in Submittals or resubmittals, deliveries, or Work. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PW\DEN003\709275 01 32 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work. 5. Other identifiable changes. 6. Revised projections of progress and completion. 7. Report of changed logic. B. Produce detailed sub-schedules during Project, upon request of Owner or Engineer, to further define critical portions of the Work such as facility shutdowns. C. If an activity is not completed by its latest scheduled completion date and this failure is anticipated to extend Contract Times (or Milestones), submit, within 7 days of such failure, a written statement as to how nonperformance will be corrected to return Project to acceptable current Progress Schedule. Actions by Contractor to complete the Work within Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be justification for adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Times. D. Owner may order Contractor to increase plant, equipment, labor force, or working hours if Contractor fails to: 1. Complete a Milestone activity by its completion date. 2. Satisfactorily execute Work as necessary to prevent delay to overall completion of Project, at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 NARRATIVE PROGRESS REPORT A. Format: 1. Organize same as Progress Schedule. 2. Identify, on a cover letter, reporting period, date submitted, and name of author of report. B. Contents: 1. Number of days worked over the period, work force on hand, construction equipment on hand (including utility vehicles such as pickup trucks, maintenance vehicles, stake trucks). 2. General progress of Work, including a listing of activities started and completed over the reporting period, mobilization/demobilization of subcontractors, and major milestones achieved. 3. Contractor’s plan for management of Site (for example, lay down and staging areas, construction traffic), use of construction equipment, buildup of trade labor, and identification of potential Contract changes. 4. Identification of new activities and sequences as a result of executed Contract changes. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION JULY 2021 01 32 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 5. Documentation of weather conditions over the reporting period, and any resulting impacts to the work. 6. Description of actual or potential delays, including related causes, and the steps taken or anticipated to mitigate their impact. 7. Changes to activity logic. 8. Changes to the critical path. 9. Identification of, and accompanying reason for, any activities added or deleted since the last report. 10. Steps taken to recover the schedule from Contractor-caused delays. 1.07 SCHEDULE ACCEPTANCE A. Engineer’s acceptance will demonstrate agreement that: 1. Proposed schedule is accepted with respect to: a. Contract Times, including Final Completion and all intermediate Milestones, are within the specified times. b. Specified Work sequences and constraints are shown as specified. c. Access restrictions are accurately reflected. d. Startup and testing times are as specified. e. Submittal review times are as specified. f. Startup testing duration is as specified and timing is acceptable. 2. In all other respects, Engineer’s acceptance of Contractor’s schedule indicates that, in Engineer’s judgment, schedule represents reasonable plan for constructing Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review will not make any change in Contract requirements. Lack of comment on any aspect of schedule that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents will not thereby indicate acceptance of that change, unless Contractor has explicitly called the nonconformance to Engineer’s attention in submittal. Schedule remains Contractor’s responsibility and Contractor retains responsibility for performing all activities, for activity durations, and for activity sequences required to construct Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Unacceptable Preliminary Progress Schedule: 1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 10 days. 2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue review and revision process, including updating schedule on a monthly basis to reflect actual progress and occurrences to date. C. Unacceptable Detailed Progress Schedule: 1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 10 days. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PW\DEN003\709275 01 32 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue review and revision process. D. Narrative Report: All changes to activity duration and sequences, including addition or deletion of activities subsequent to Engineer’s acceptance of Baseline Progress Schedule, shall be delineated in Narrative Report current with proposed Updated Progress Schedule. 1.08 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES A. Evaluation and reconciliation of Adjustments of Contract Times shall be based on the Updated Progress Schedule at the time of proposed adjustment or claimed delay. B. Claims Based on Contract Times: 1. Where Engineer has not yet rendered formal decision on Contractor’s Claim for adjustment of Contract Times, and parties are unable to agree as to amount of adjustment to be reflected in Progress Schedule, reflect an interim adjustment in the Progress Schedule as acceptable to Engineer. 2. It is understood and agreed that such interim acceptance will not be binding on either Contractor or Owner, and will be made only for the purpose of continuing to schedule Work until such time as formal decision has been rendered as to an adjustment, if any, of the Contract Times. 3. Revise Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in accordance with Engineer’s formal decision. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 33 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor that requires Engineer’s approval. B. Deferred Submittal: Information, in accordance with 2018 IBC Section 107.3.4.1 submitted by Contractor for portions of design that are to be submitted to permitting agency for approval prior to installation of that portion of the Work, along with Engineer’s review documentation that submittal has been found to be in general conformance with Project’s design. C. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor that requires Engineer’s review and determination that submitted information is in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract. 1.02 PROCEDURES A. Direct submittals to Engineer at the emailing address provided at the preconstruction conference, unless specified otherwise. B. Electronic Submittals: Submittals shall, unless specifically accepted, be made in electronic format. 1. Each submittal shall be an electronic file in Portable Document Format (PDF). 2. Electronic files that contain more than 10 pages in PDF format shall contain internal bookmarking from an index page to major sections of the document. 3. PDF files shall be set to open “Bookmarks and Page” view. 4. Add general information to each PDF file, including title, subject, author, and keywords. 5. PDF files shall be set up to print legibly at 8.5-inch by 11-inch, 11-inch by 17-inch, or 22-inch by 34-inch. No other paper sizes will be accepted. 6. Submit new electronic files for each resubmittal. 7. Include a copy of the Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal form, located at end of section, with each electronic file. 8. Provide Engineer with authorization to reproduce and distribute each file as many times as necessary for Project documentation. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 33 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 9. Detailed procedures for handling electronic submittals will be discussed at the preconstruction conference. C. Transmittal of Submittal: 1. Contractor shall: a. Review each submittal and check for compliance with Contract Documents. b. Stamp each submittal with uniform approval stamp before submitting to Engineer. 1) Stamp to include Project name, submittal number, Specification number, Contractor’s reviewer name, date of Contractor’s approval, and statement certifying submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with Contract Documents. 2) Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp and will return them without action. 2. Complete, sign, and transmit with each submittal package, one Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal form attached at end of this section. 3. Identify each submittal with the following: a. Numbering and Tracking System: 1) Sequentially number each submittal. 2) Resubmission of submittal shall have original number with sequential alphabetic suffix. b. Specification section and paragraph to which submittal applies. c. Project title and Engineer’s project number. d. Date of transmittal. e. Names of Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier, and manufacturer as appropriate. 4. Identify and describe each deviation or variation from Contract Documents. D. Format: 1. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of Contract Documents. 2. Package submittal information by individual specification section. Do not combine different specification sections together in submittal package, unless otherwise directed in specification. 3. Present in a clear and thorough manner and in sufficient detail to show kind, size, arrangement, and function of components, materials, and devices, and compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Index with labeled tab dividers in orderly manner. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 33 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS E. Timeliness: Schedule and submit in accordance Schedule of Submittals and requirements of individual specification sections. F. Processing Time: 1. Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal. 2. Engineer will act upon Contractor’s submittal and transmit response to Contractor not later than 14 calendar days after receipt, unless otherwise specified. 3. Resubmittals will be subject to same review time. 4. No adjustment of Contract Times or Price will be allowed as a result of delays in progress of Work caused by rejection and subsequent resubmittals. G. Resubmittals: Clearly identify each correction or change made. H. Incomplete Submittals: 1. Engineer will return entire submittal for Contractor’s revision if preliminary review deems it incomplete. 2. When any of the following are missing, submittal will be deemed incomplete: a. Contractor’s review stamp; completed and signed. b. Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal; completed and signed. I. Submittals not required by Contract Documents: Will not be reviewed and will be returned stamped “Not Subject to Review.” 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual specification sections. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Identify and Indicate: a. Applicable Contract Drawing and Detail number, products, units and assemblies, and system or equipment identification or tag numbers. b. Equipment and Component Title: Identical to title shown on Drawings. c. Critical field dimensions and relationships to other critical features of Work. Note dimensions established by field measurement. d. Project-specific information drawn accurately to scale. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 33 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows: a. Modify to delete information that is not applicable to the Work. b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 3. Product Data: Provide as specified in individual specifications. 4. Deferred Submittal: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals. a. Contractor-design drawings and product data related to permanent construction. 1) Written and graphic information. 2) Drawings. 3) Cut sheets. 4) Data sheets. 5) Action item submittals requested in individual specification section. b. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural element, equipment, distribution system, or component or its anchorage, submit required supporting data and drawings for review and acceptance by Engineer. Documentation of review and approval provided on Engineer’s comment form, along with completed submittal, shall be filed with permitting agency by Contractor and approved by permitting agency prior to installation. 5. Foreign Manufacturers: When proposed, include names and addresses of at least two companies that maintain technical service representatives close to Project. C. Samples: 1. Copies: Two, unless otherwise specified in individual specifications. 2. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of quality. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Manufacturer name. b. Model number. c. Material. d. Sample source. 3. Manufacturer’s Color Chart: Units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 4. Full-size Samples: a. Size as indicated in individual specification section. b. Prepared from same materials to be used for the Work. c. Cured and finished in manner specified. d. Physically identical with product proposed for use. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 33 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS D. Action Submittal Dispositions: Engineer will review, comment, stamp, and distribute as noted: 1. Approved: a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. b. Distribution: Electronic. 2. Approved as Noted: a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineer’s notations. b. Distribution: Electronic. 3. Partial Approval, Resubmit as Noted: a. Make corrections or obtain missing portions, and resubmit. b. Except for portions indicated, Contractor may begin to incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineer’s notations. c. Distribution: Electronic. 4. Revise and Resubmit: a. Contractor may not incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. b. Distribution: Electronic. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Refer to individual specification sections for specific submittal requirements. 2. Engineer will review each submittal. If submittal meets conditions of the Contract, Engineer will forward copy to appropriate parties. If Engineer determines submittal does not meet conditions of the Contract and is therefore considered unacceptable Engineer will return submittal with review comments to Contractor, and require that submittal be corrected and resubmitted. B. Certificates: 1. General: a. Provide notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. b. Signed by officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 33 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Installer: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying installer complies with requirements as specified in individual specification section. 3. Material Test: Prepared by qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. 4. Certificates of Successful Testing or Inspection: Submit when testing or inspection is required by Laws and Regulations or governing agency or specified in individual specification sections. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 6. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. C. Construction Photographs: In accordance with Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, and as may otherwise be required in Contract Documents. D. Closeout Submittals: In accordance with Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures. E. Contractor-design Data (related to temporary construction): 1. Written and graphic information. 2. List of assumptions. 3. List of performance and design criteria. 4. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable. 5. Calculations. 6. List of applicable codes and regulations. 7. Name and version of software. 8. Information requested in individual specification section. F. Deferred Submittals: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals. 1. Contractor-design data related to permanent construction: a. List of assumptions. b. List of performance and design criteria. c. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable. d. Calculations. e. List of applicable codes and regulations. f. Name and version of design software. g. Factory test results. h. Informational submittals requested in individual specification section. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 33 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural element, equipment, distribution system, or component or its anchorage, submit calculations and test results of Contractor-designed components for review by Engineer. Documentation of review and indication of compliance with general design intent and project criteria provided on Engineer’s comment form as meets conditions of the Contract, along with completed submittal, shall be filed with permitting agency by Contractor and approved by permitting agency prior to installation. G. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Written or published information that documents manufacturer’s recommendations, guidelines, and procedures in accordance with individual specification section. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: As required in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. I. Payment: 1. Application for Payment: In accordance with Section 01 29 00, Payment Procedures. 2. Schedule of Values: In accordance with Section 01 29 00, Payment Procedures. J. Quality Control Documentation: As required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. K. Schedules: 1. Schedule of Submittals: Prepare separately or in combination with Progress Schedule as specified in Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation. a. Show for each, at a minimum, the following: 1) Specification section number. 2) Identification by numbering and tracking system as specified under Paragraph Transmittal of Submittal. 3) Estimated date of submission to Engineer, including reviewing and processing time. b. On a monthly basis, submit updated Schedule of Submittals to Engineer if changes have occurred or resubmittals are required. 2. Progress Schedules: In accordance with Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation. L. Special Guarantee: Supplier’s written guarantee as required in individual specification sections. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 33 00 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS M. Statement of Qualification: Evidence of qualification, certification, or registration as required in Contract Documents to verify qualifications of professional land surveyor, engineer, materials testing laboratory, specialty Subcontractor, trade, Specialist, consultant, installer, and other professionals. N. Submittals Required by Laws, Regulations, and Governing Agencies: 1. Promptly submit promptly notifications, reports, certifications, payrolls, and otherwise as may be required, directly to the applicable federal, state, or local governing agency or their representative. 2. Transmit to Engineer for Owner’s records one copy of correspondence and transmittals (to include enclosures and attachments) between Contractor and governing agency. O. Test, Evaluation, and Inspection Reports: 1. General: Shall contain signature of person responsible for test or report. 2. Factory: a. Identification of product and specification section, type of inspection or test with referenced standard or code. b. Date of test, Project title and number, and name and signature of authorized person. c. Test results. d. If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective action necessary to bring into compliance. e. Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer. f. Other items as identified in individual specification sections. 3. Field: a. As a minimum, include the following: 1) Project title and number. 2) Date and time. 3) Record of temperature and weather conditions. 4) Identification of product and specification section. 5) Type and location of test, Sample, or inspection, including referenced standard or code. 6) Date issued, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and name and signature of laboratory inspector. 7) If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective action necessary to bring into compliance. 8) Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer. 9) Other items as identified in individual specification sections. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 33 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS P. Testing and Startup Data: In accordance with Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. Q. Training Data: In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. 1.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section”, is part of this Specification. 1. Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TRANSMITTAL OF CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL (ATTACH TO EACH SUBMITTAL) DATE: TO: FROM: Contractor Submittal No.: New Submittal Resubmittal Project: Project No.: Specification Section No.: (Cover only one section with each transmittal) Schedule Date of Submittal: SUBMITTAL TYPE: Shop Drawing Sample Informational Deferred The following items are hereby submitted: Number of Copies Description of Item Submitted (Type, Size, Model Number, Etc.) Spec. and Para. No. Drawing or Brochure Number Contains Variation to Contract No Yes Contractor hereby certifies that (i) Contractor has complied with the requirements of Contract Documents in preparation, review, and submission of designated Submittal and (ii) the Submittal is complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents and requirements of laws and regulations and governing agencies. By:___________________________________ Contractor (Authorized Signature) CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES JULY 2021 01 43 33 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 43 33 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Person-Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Training Schedule: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this Specification, not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment installation and revise as necessary for acceptance. 2. Lesson Plan: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this Specification, proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to scheduled training and revise as necessary for acceptance. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, and experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system, with full authority by the equipment manufacturer to issue the certifications required of the manufacturer. Additional qualifications may be specified in the individual specification section. B. Representative subject to acceptance by Owner and Engineer. No substitute representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by such has been given. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FULFILLMENT OF SPECIFIED MINIMUM SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturers’ services, when required by an individual specification section, to meet the requirements of this section. 1. Contractor to note that manufacturer of FRP wetwell is to provide field support for making piping connections to the wetwell including but not CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES PW\DEN003\709275 01 43 33 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS limited to bonding FRP nozzles to existing pipes and hand layup of nozzles to seal FRP shell at openings. B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Specifications for manufacturers’ services, or when a minimum time is not specified, time required to perform specified services shall be considered incidental. C. Schedule manufacturer’ services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or other manufacturers’ onsite services. D. Determine, before scheduling services, that conditions necessary to allow successful testing have been met. E. Only those days of service approved by Engineer will be credited to fulfill specified minimum services. F. When specified in individual specification sections, manufacturer’s onsite services shall include: 1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component) installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of Contractor’s assembly, erection, installation or application procedures. 2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system, subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by manufacturer and necessary to furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. Providing, on a daily basis, copies of manufacturers’ representatives field notes and data to Engineer. 4. Revisiting the Site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to Engineer. 5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to or associated with respective manufacturer’s products and systems. 6. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility startup and evaluation. 7. Training of Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as required. 3.02 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by equipment manufacturer’s representative. B. Such form shall certify signing party is a duly authorized representative of manufacturer, is empowered by manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES JULY 2021 01 43 33 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to ensure equipment is complete and operational. 3.03 TRAINING A. General: 1. Furnish manufacturers’ representatives for detailed classroom and hands-on training to Owner’s personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product (system, subsystem, component) and as may be required in applicable Specifications. 2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with Owner, and familiar with operation and maintenance manual information specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Manufacturer’s representative shall be familiar with facility operation and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment. 4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and maintenance data, to be retained by each trainee. B. Training Schedule: 1. List specified equipment and systems that require training services and show: a. Respective manufacturer. b. Estimated dates for installation completion. c. Estimated training dates. 2. Allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved. 3. Adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary by Owner, and to allow full participation by manufacturers’ representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment. 4. Coordinate with Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. C. Lesson Plan: When manufacturer or vendor training of Owner personnel is specified, prepare a lesson plan for each required course containing the following minimum information: 1. Title and objectives. 2. Recommended attendees (such as, managers, engineers, operators, maintenance). 3. Course description, outline of course content, and estimated class duration. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES PW\DEN003\709275 01 43 33 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. Format (such as, lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on). 5. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 6. Resumes of instructors providing training. D. Prestartup Training: 1. Coordinate training sessions with Owner’s operating personnel and manufacturers’ representatives, and with submission of operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Complete at least 14 days prior to beginning of facility startup. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this Specification. 1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES JULY 2021 01 43 33 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION OWNER EQPT SERIAL NO: EQPT TAG NO: EQPT/SYSTEM: PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION: I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been: (Check Applicable) Installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. Inspected, checked, and adjusted. Serviced with proper initial lubricants. Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards. All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. Functional tests. System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements. (When complete system of one manufacturer) Note: Attach any performance test documentation from manufacturer. Comments: I, the undersigned Manufacturer’s Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to ensure equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: _________________________________, 20___ Manufacturer: By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative: (Authorized Signature) CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL JULY 2021 01 45 16.13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 45 16.13 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. b. E329, Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in Construction. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The means by which Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that performed by subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the requirements of the Contract. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. CQC Plan: Submit, not later than 30 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. 2. CQC Report: Submit, weekly, an original and one copy in report form. 1.04 OWNER’S QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All Work is subject to Owner’s quality assurance inspection and testing at all locations and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents. B. Owner’s quality assurance inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not: 1. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance; 3. Constitute or imply acceptance; or CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 45 16.13 - 2 JULY 20211 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. Affect the continuing rights of Owner after acceptance of the completed Work. C. The presence or absence of a quality assurance inspector does not relieve Contractor from any Contract requirement. D. Promptly furnish all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Engineer. E. Owner may charge Contractor for any additional cost of inspection or test when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Quality assurance inspections and tests will be performed in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that the Work conforms to the Contract Documents. B. Maintain complete inspection records and make them available at all times to Owner and Engineer. C. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product that complies with the Contract Documents. The system shall cover all construction and demolition operations, both onsite and offsite, including Work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents, and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence. 3.02 COORDINATION MEETING A. After the Preconstruction Conference, but before start of construction, and prior to acceptance of the CQC Plan, schedule a meeting with Engineer and Owner to discuss the quality control system. B. Develop a mutual understanding of the system details, including the forms for recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite Work, and the interrelationship of Contractor’s management and control with the Owner’s Quality Assurance. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL JULY 2021 01 45 16.13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences may be called by either party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures that may require corrective action by Contractor. 3.03 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION A. CQC System Manager: 1. Designate an individual within Contractor’s organization who will be responsible for overall management of CQC and have the authority to act in CQC matters for the Contractor. 2. CQC System Manager may perform other duties on the Project. 3. CQC System Manager shall be an experienced construction person, with a minimum of 3 years construction experience on similar type Work. 4. CQC System Manager shall report to the Contractor’s project manager or someone higher in the organization. Project manager in this context shall mean the individual with responsibility for the overall quality and production management of the Project. 5. CQC System Manager shall be onsite during construction; periods of absence may not exceed 2 weeks at any one time. 6. Identify an alternate for CQC System Manager to serve with full authority during the System Manager’s absence. The requirements for the alternate will be the same as for designated CQC System Manager. B. CQC Staff: 1. Designate a CQC staff, available at the Site at all times during progress, with complete authority to take any action necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract. CQC staff members shall be subject to acceptance by Engineer. 2. CQC staff shall take direction from CQC System Manager in matters pertaining to QC. 3. CQC staff must be of sufficient size to ensure adequate QC coverage of Work phases, work shifts, and work crews involved in the construction. These personnel may perform other duties, but must be fully qualified by experience and technical training to perform their assigned QC responsibilities and must be allowed sufficient time to carry out these responsibilities. 4. The actual strength of the CQC staff may vary during any specific Work period to cover the needs of the Project. Add additional staff when necessary for a proper CQC organization. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 45 16.13 - 4 JULY 20211 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Organizational Changes: Obtain Engineer’s acceptance before replacing any member of the CQC staff. Requests for changes shall include name, qualifications, duties, and responsibilities of the proposed replacement. 3.04 QUALITY CONTROL PHASING A. CQC shall include at least three phases of control to be conducted by CQC System Manager for all definable features of Work, as follows: 1. Preparatory Phase: a. Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning any of the required action of the preparatory phase. b. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The CQC System Manager shall instruct applicable CQC staff as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet Contract requirements. c. Document the results of the preparatory phase meeting by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the QC report. d. Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of Work: 1) Review applicable Contract Specifications. 2) Review applicable Contract Drawings. 3) Verify that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. 4) Verify that provisions have been made to provide required control inspection and testing. 5) Examine the Work area to verify that all required preliminary Work has been completed and is in compliance with the Contract. 6) Perform a physical examination of required materials, equipment, and sample Work to verify that they are on hand, conform to approved Shop Drawing or submitted data, and are properly stored. 7) Review the appropriate activity hazard analysis to verify safety requirements are met. 8) Review procedures for constructing the Work, including repetitive deficiencies. 9) Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that phase of the Work. 10) Check to verify that the plan for the Work to be performed, if so required, has been accepted by Engineer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL JULY 2021 01 45 16.13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Initial Phase: a. Accomplish at the beginning of a definable feature of Work: 1) Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase. 2) Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of Work: a) Review minutes of the preparatory meeting. b) Check preliminary Work to verify compliance with Contract requirements. c) Verify required control inspection and testing. d) Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Comparison with sample panels is appropriate. e) Resolve all differences. f) Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker. 3) Separate minutes of this phase shall be prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the QC report. Exact location of initial phase shall be indicated for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases. 4) The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: a. Perform daily checks to verify continuing compliance with Contract requirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular feature of Work. b. Daily checks shall be made a matter of record in the CQC documentation and shall document specific results of inspections for all features of Work for the day or shift. c. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of Work that will be affected by the deficient Work. Constructing upon or concealing nonconforming Work will not be allowed. 4. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases: Additional preparatory and initial phases may be conducted on the same definable features of Work as determined by Owner if the quality of ongoing Work is unacceptable; or if there are changes in the applicable QC staff or in the onsite production supervision or work crew; or if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 45 16.13 - 6 JULY 20211 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.05 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. General: 1. Plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control, instructions, test, records, and forms to be used. 2. An interim plan for the first 30 days of operation will be considered. 3. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of Work to be started. 4. Work outside of the features of Work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of Work to be started. B. Content: 1. Plan shall cover the intended CQC organization for the entire Contract and shall include the following, as a minimum: a. Organization: Description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will implement the three-phase control system (see Article Quality Control Phasing) for all aspects of the Work specified. b. CQC Staff: The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a QC function. c. Letters of Authority: A copy of a letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm, describing the responsibilities and delegating sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop Work which is not in compliance with the Contract. The CQC System Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities and responsibilities. Copies of these letters will also be furnished to Owner. d. Submittals: Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents. e. Testing: Control, verification and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, frequency, specification paragraph containing the test requirements, the personnel and laboratory responsible for each type of test, and an estimate of the number of tests required. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL JULY 2021 01 45 16.13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests, including documentation. g. Procedures for tracking deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. These procedures will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected. h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats; include a copy of the CQC report form. C. Acceptance of Plans: Acceptance of the Contractor’s basic and addendum CQC plans is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to make changes in the CQC plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified. D. Notification of Changes: After acceptance of the CQC plan, Contractor shall notify Engineer, in writing, a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by Engineer. 3.06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT A. As a minimum, prepare a CQC report for every 7 calendar days. Account for all days throughout the life of the Contract. Reports shall be signed and dated by CQC System Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by QC staff. B. Maintain current records of quality control operations, activities, and tests performed, including the Work of subcontractors and suppliers. C. Records shall be on an acceptable form and shall be a complete description of inspections, the results of inspections, daily activities, tests, and other items, including but not limited to the following: 1. Contractor/subcontractor and their areas of responsibility. 2. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair. 3. Work performed today, giving location, description, and by whom. When a network schedule is used, identify each phase of Work performed each day by activity number. 4. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to specifications/plan requirements. The control phase should be identified (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List deficiencies noted along with corrective action. 5. Material received with statement as to its acceptability and storage. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 45 16.13 - 8 JULY 20211 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 6. Identify submittals reviewed, with Contract reference, by whom, and action taken. 7. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken. 8. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and instructions or corrective actions. 9. List instructions given/received and conflicts in Drawings and/or Specifications. 10. Contractor’s verification statement. 11. Indicate a description of trades working on the Project; the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered. 12. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient features and shall include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in file work and workmanship comply with the Contract. 3.07 SUBMITTAL QUALITY CONTROL A. Submittals shall be as specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. The CQC organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals are in compliance with the Contract requirements. Owner will furnish copies of test report forms upon request by Contractor. Contractor may use other forms as approved. 3.08 TESTING QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Procedure: 1. Perform tests specified or required to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to Contract requirements. Perform the following activities and record the following data: a. Verify testing procedures comply with contract requirements. b. Verify facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards. c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards. d. Verify recording forms and test identification control number system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared. e. Documentation: 1) Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing, on the CQC report for the date taken. 2) Include specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL JULY 2021 01 45 16.13 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3) Actual test reports may be submitted later, if approved by Engineer, with a reference to the test number and date taken. 4) Provide directly to Engineer an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility. Test results shall be signed by an engineer registered in the state where the tests are performed. 5) Failure to submit timely test reports, as stated, may result in nonpayment for related Work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this Contract. B. Testing Laboratories: Laboratory facilities, including personnel and equipment, utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329, and be accredited by the American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (AALA), National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or other approved national accreditation authority. Personnel performing concrete testing shall be certified by the American Concrete Institute (ACI). 3.09 COMPLETION INSPECTION A. CQC System Manager shall conduct an inspection of the Work at the completion of all Work or any milestone established by a completion time stated in the Contract. B. Punchlist: 1. CQC System Manager shall develop a punchlist of items which do not conform to the Contract requirements. 2. Include punchlist in the CQC report, indicating the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. 3. CQC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the Owner. 4. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required will be accomplished within the time stated for completion of the entire Work or any particular increment thereof if the Project is divided into increments by separate completion dates. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2021 01 50 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of Nurserymen (AAN): American Standards for Nursery Stock. 2. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA). 3. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA): 241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. 4. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA); Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA): 568B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 5. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA): Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds. 6. U.S. Weather Bureau: Rainfall-Frequency Atlas of the U.S. for Durations from 30 Minutes to 24 Hours and Return Periods from 1 to 100 Years. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Copies of permits and approvals for construction as required by Laws and Regulations and governing agencies. 2. Temporary Utility Submittals: a. Electric power supply and distribution plans. b. Sanitary. 3. Temporary Construction Submittals: a. Contractor’s field office, storage yard, and storage building plans. b. Fencing and protective barrier locations and details. c. Staging area location plan. d. Plan for maintenance of existing plant operations. 4. Temporary Control Submittals: a. Noise control plan. b. Dust control plan. c. Plan for disposal of waste materials and intended haul routes. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW\DEN003\709275 01 50 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.03 MOBILIZATION A. Mobilization includes, but is not limited to, these principal items: 1. Obtaining required permits. 2. Moving Contractor’s field office and equipment required for first month operations onto Site. 3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 4. Providing onsite Internet service. 5. Providing onsite sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified and as required by Laws and Regulations, and governing agencies. 6. Arranging for and erection of Contractor’s work and storage yard. 7. Posting OSHA required notices and establishing safety programs and procedures. 8. Having Contractor’s superintendent at Site full time. B. Use area designated for Contractor’s temporary facilities as shown on Drawings. 1.04 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Comply with Owner’s safety rules while on Owner’s property. B. Keep Owner informed of serious onsite accidents and related claims. C. Use of Explosives: No blasting or use of explosives will be allowed onsite. 1.05 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC A. Traffic Control: Portions of streets within limits of the Work may be closed to through traffic. Obtain approval from Owner prior to restricting or eliminating traffic or parking lanes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROJECT SIGN A. Provide and maintain one, 8-foot wide by 4-foot high sign constructed of 3/4-inch exterior high density overlaid plywood. Sign shall bear name of Project, Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and other participating agencies. Lettering shall be blue or black applied on white background by an experienced sign painter. Include Owner’s logo in full color. Provide exterior type enamel paint. Information to be included and logo graphic will be provided by Owner. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2021 01 50 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Power: 1. Electric power will be available at Site. As necessary, determine type and amount available and make arrangements for obtaining temporary electric power service, metering equipment, and pay costs for electric power used during Contract period, except for portions of the Work designated in writing by Engineer. 2. Cost of electric power, if necessary, for temporary sewage pumping will be borne by Owner. B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting to meet applicable safety requirements to allow erection, application, or installation of materials and equipment, and observation or inspection of the Work. C. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating: 1. Provide as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for installation of materials, and to protect materials, equipment, and finishes from damage because of temperature or humidity. Costs for temporary heat shall be borne by Contractor. 2. Provide adequate forced air ventilation of enclosed areas to cure installed materials, to dispense humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 3. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation, removal, and fuel consumed. 4. Provide portable unit heaters, complete with controls, oil- or gas-fired, and suitably vented to outside as required for protection of health and property. 5. If permanent natural gas piping is used for temporary heating units, do not modify or reroute gas piping without approval of utility company. Provide separate gas metering as required by utility. D. Water: 1. Hydrant Water: a. Is available from nearby hydrants. Secure written permission for connection and use from water department and meet requirements for use. Notify fire department before obtaining water from fire hydrants. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW\DEN003\709275 01 50 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS b. Use only special hydrant-operating wrenches to open hydrants. Make certain hydrant valve is open full, since cracking valve causes damage to hydrant. Repair damaged hydrants and notify appropriate agency as quickly as possible. Hydrants shall be completely accessible to fire department at all times. 2. Provide temporary facilities and piping required to bring water to point of use and remove when no longer needed. E. Sanitary and Personnel Facilities: Provide and maintain facilities for Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors, and other onsite employers’ employees. Service, clean, and maintain facilities and enclosures. F. Fire Protection: Furnish and maintain on Site adequate firefighting equipment capable of extinguishing incipient fires. Comply with applicable parts of NFPA 241. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. General: 1. Perform Work within right-of-way and easements in a systematic manner that minimizes inconvenience to property owners and the public. 2. No residence or business shall be cut off from vehicular traffic, unless special arrangements have been made. 3. Maintain in continuous service existing oil and gas pipelines, underground power, telephone or communication cable, water mains, irrigation lines, sewers, poles and overhead power, and other utilities encountered along line of the Work, unless other arrangements satisfactory to owners of said utilities have been made. 4. Where completion of the Work requires temporary or permanent removal or relocation of existing utility, coordinate activities with owner of said utility and perform work to their satisfaction. 5. Protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground utility construction uncovered or otherwise affected by construction operations. 6. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and available for use at all times. 7. In areas where Contractor’s operations are adjacent to or near a utility, such as gas, telephone, television, electric power, water, sewer, or irrigation system, and such operations may cause damage or inconvenience, suspend operations until arrangements necessary for protection have been made by Contractor. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2021 01 50 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 8. Notify property owners and utility offices that may be affected by construction operation at least 2 days in advance: Before exposing a utility, obtain utility owner’s permission. Should service of utility be interrupted due to Contractor’s operation, notify proper authority immediately. Cooperate with said authority in restoring service as promptly as possible and bear costs incurred. 9. Do not impair operation of existing sewer system. Prevent construction material, pavement, concrete, earth, volatile and corrosive wastes, and other debris from entering sewers, pump stations, or other sewer structures. 10. Maintain original Site drainage wherever possible. B. Site Security: 1. Erect a temporary security fence as necessary for protection of existing facilities. Maintain fence throughout construction period. Obtain Engineer’s written permission before removal of temporary security fencing. 2. Provide and maintain additional temporary security fences as necessary to protect the Work and Contractor-furnished products not yet installed. C. Barricades and Lights: 1. Provide as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and affected roads, streets, and alleyways, inside and outside of fenced area, and as required to ensure public safety and the safety of Contractor’s employees, other employer’s employees, and others who may be affected by the Work. 2. Provide to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from potential damage. 3. Locate to enable access by facility operators and property owners. 4. Protect streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to traffic by effective barricades with acceptable warning signs. 5. Locate barricades at the nearest intersecting public thoroughfare on each side of blocked section. 6. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset to sunrise. D. Signs and Equipment: 1. Conform to requirements of manual published by the Washington State Department of Transportation. 2. Portable TOW-AWAY-NO STOPPING Signs: Place where approved by police department. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW\DEN003\709275 01 50 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Traffic Cones: Provide to delineate traffic lanes to guide and separate traffic movements. 4. CONSTRUCTION AHEAD Signs: Provide two, size 48 inches by 48 inches. Place in conspicuous locations, approximately 200 feet in advance of the Work, and facing approaching traffic from both directions (Gaines Street and Water Street). 5. ROAD CLOSED AHEAD Signs: Provide two, place in advance of lane to be closed. 6. Provide at obstructions, such as material piles and equipment. 7. Use to alert general public of construction hazards, which would include surface irregularities, unramped walkways, grade changes, and trenches or excavations in roadways and in other public access areas. E. Trees and Plantings: 1. Protect from damage and preserve trees, shrubs, and other plants outside limits of the Work and within limits of the Work, which are designated on Drawings to remain undisturbed. a. Do not stockpile materials or permit traffic within drip lines of trees. b. Provide and maintain temporary barricades around trees. c. Water vegetation as necessary to maintain health. d. Cover temporarily exposed roots with wet burlap, and keep burlap moist until soil is replaced around roots. e. No trees, except those specifically shown on Drawings to be removed, shall be removed without written approval of Engineer. f. Dispose of removed trees in a legal manner off the Site. 2. Balling and burlapping of trees indicated for replacement shall conform to recommended specifications set forth in the American Standards for Nursery Stock, published by American Association of Nurserymen. Balls shall be firm and intact and made-balls will not be accepted. Handle ball and burlap trees by ball and not by top. 3. In event of damage to bark, trunks, limbs, or roots of plants that are not designated for removal, treat damage by corrective pruning, bark tracing, application of a heavy coating of tree paint, and other accepted horticultural and tree surgery practices. 4. Replace each plant that dies as a result of construction activities. F. Existing Structures: 1. Where Contractor contemplates removal of small structures such as mailboxes, signposts, and culverts that interfere with Contractor’s operations, obtain approval of property owner and Engineer. 2. Move mailboxes to temporary locations accessible to postal service. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2021 01 50 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Replace items removed in their original location and a condition equal to or better than original. G. Finished Construction: Protect finished floors and concrete floors exposed as well as those covered with composition tile or other applied surfacing. H. Waterways: Keep ditches, culverts, and natural drainages continuously free of construction materials and debris. I. Dewatering: Construct, maintain, and operate cofferdams, channels, flume drains, sumps, pumps, or other temporary diversion and protection works. Furnish materials required, install, maintain, and operate necessary pumping and other equipment for the environmentally safe removal and disposal of water from the various parts of the Work. Maintain foundations and parts of the Work free from water. J. Endangered and Threatened Species: 1. Take precautions necessary and prudent to protect native endangered and threatened flora and fauna. 2. Notify Engineer of construction activities that might threaten endangered and threatened species or their habitats. 3. Engineer will mark areas known as habitats of endangered and threatened species prior to commencement of onsite activities. 4. Additional areas will be marked by Engineer as other habitats of endangered and threatened species become known during construction. 3.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Air Pollution Control: 1. Minimize air pollution from construction operations. 2. Burning: Burning of waste materials, rubbish, or other debris will not be permitted on or adjacent to Site. 3. Conduct operations of dumping rock and of carrying rock away in trucks to cause a minimum of dust. Give unpaved streets, roads, detours, or haul roads used in construction area a dust-preventive treatment or periodically water to prevent dust. Strictly adhere to applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention. 4. Provide and maintain temporary dust-tight partitions, bulkheads, or other protective devices during construction to permit normal operation of existing facilities. Construct partitions of plywood, insulating board, plastic sheets, or similar material. Construct partitions in such a manner that dust and dirt from demolition and cutting will not enter other parts CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW\DEN003\709275 01 50 00 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS of existing building or facilities. Remove temporary partitions as soon as need no longer exists. B. Noise Control: 1. Provide acoustical barriers so noise emanating from tools or equipment will not exceed legal noise levels. 2. Comply with local Noise Control Ordinance. 3. Noise Control Plan: Propose plan to mitigate construction noise and to comply with noise control ordinances, including method of construction, equipment to be used, and acoustical treatments. C. Water Pollution Control: 1. Divert sanitary sewage and non-storm waste flow interfering with construction and requiring diversion to sanitary sewers. Do not cause or permit action to occur which would cause an overflow to existing waterway. 2. Prior to commencing excavation and construction, obtain Engineer’s agreement with detailed plans showing procedures intended to handle and dispose of sewage, groundwater, and dewatering pump discharges. 3. Comply with Section 01 57 13, Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control, for stormwater flow and surface runoff. 4. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, chemicals, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. Disposal of wastes into streams or waterways is prohibited. Provide acceptable containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. D. Erosion, Sediment, and Flood Control: Provide, maintain, and operate temporary facilities as specified in Section 01 57 13, Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control, to control erosion and sediment releases, and to protect the Work and existing facilities from flooding during construction period. 3.04 STORAGE YARDS AND BUILDINGS A. Coordinate requirements with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. B. Temporary Storage Yards: Construct temporary storage yards for storage of products that are not subject to damage by weather conditions. C. Temporary Storage Buildings: 1. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of equipment and materials stored. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2021 01 50 00 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Arrange or partition to provide security of contents and ready access for inspection and inventory. 3. Store combustible materials (paints, solvents, fuels) in a well-ventilated and remote building meeting safety standards. 3.05 ACCESS ROADS A. Use existing roads where shown. B. Coordinate with Engineer detours and other operations affecting traffic and access. Provide at least 72 hours’ notice to Engineer of operations that will alter access to Site. 3.06 PARKING AREAS A. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by emergency vehicles, Owner’s operations, or construction operations. B. Provide parking facilities for personnel working on Project. No employee or equipment parking will be permitted on Owner’s existing paved areas, except as specifically designated for Contractor’s use. C. Use area designated on Drawings for parking of Contractor’s and Contractor’s employees’ vehicles. 3.07 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC A. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding closing or restricting use of public streets or highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by written permission of proper authority. Ensure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits. B. Conduct the Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. C. Whenever it is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for accommodation of public and private travel. D. Road Closures: Maintain satisfactory means of exit for persons residing or having occasion to transact business in the vicinity of the Work. If it is necessary to close off roadway or alley providing sole vehicular access to property for periods greater than 2 hours, provide written notice to each owner CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW\DEN003\709275 01 50 00 - 10 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS so affected 3 days prior to such closure. In such cases, closings of up to 4 hours may be allowed. Closures of up to 10 hours may be allowed if a week’s written notice is given and undue hardship does not result. E. Maintenance of traffic is not required if Contractor obtains written permission from Owner and tenant of private property, or from authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at designated point. F. When flaggers and guards are required by regulation or when deemed necessary for safety, furnish them with approved orange wearing apparel and other regulation traffic control devices. G. Notify fire department and police department before closing street or portion thereof. Notify said departments when streets are again passable for emergency vehicles. Do not block off emergency vehicle access to consecutive arterial crossings or dead-end streets, in excess of 300 linear feet, without written permission from fire department. Conduct operations with the least interference to fire equipment access, and at no time prevent such access. Furnish Contractor’s night emergency telephone numbers to police department. H. Coordinate traffic routing with that of others working in same or adjacent areas. 3.08 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. In accordance with General Conditions, as may be specified in other Specification sections, and as required herein. B. Wet down exterior surfaces prior to sweeping to prevent blowing of dust and debris. At least weekly, sweep floors (basins, tunnels, platforms, walkways, roof surfaces), and pick up and dispose of debris. C. Provide approved containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. At least weekly, dispose of such waste materials, debris, and rubbish offsite. D. At least weekly, brush sweep entry drive, roadways, and other streets and walkways affected by the Work and where adjacent to the Work. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section covers Work to implement structural and nonstructural Best Management Practices (BMP) to control soil erosion by wind or water and keep eroded sediments and other construction-generated pollutants from moving off Project sites. Requirements described in this Specification and shown on Drawings are part of the Project Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (TESC Plan) and are the minimum for all Project construction sites and conditions. This Specification covers all Project activities, including material sources, disposal sites, and offsite mitigation areas unless specific Project activities are excluded elsewhere in this Specification or in other Contract Documents controlling the Work. B. National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System: Comply with federal, state, and local laws, rules and regulations, and the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Construction Stormwater Discharge Permit or Permits applicable to the Project. A copy of the Project’s General Construction Permit, if applicable to the Project, is available from Owner. NPDES General Construction permits are required on projects that involve disturbance of 1 acre or more with potential to discharge stormwater to surface waters. C. Other Regulations: A local government erosion and sediment control permit may apply and some local agency requirements may be more stringent than this Specification. Adequate erosion and sediment control is essential for complying with the federal Endangered Species Act where construction runoff enters waters inhabited by protected species. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Activities shall conform to the Stormwater Management Manual for Western Washington and Drawings. In the event of a conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M252, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. b. D2974, Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils. c. D3776/D3776M, Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric. d. D4355, Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. e. D4397, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. f. D4491, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. g. D4533, Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. h. D4632/D4632M, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. i. D4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile j. D6241, Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe. k. D6459, Standard Test Method for Determination of Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP) Performance in Protecting Hillslopes from Rainfall-Induced Erosion. l. D6460, Standard Test Method for Determination of Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP) Performance in Protecting Earthen Channels from Stormwater-Induced Erosion. m. D6475, Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass Per Unit Area of Erosion Control Blankets. n. D7322, Standard Test Method for Determination of Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP) Ability to Encourage Seed Germination and Plant Growth Under Bench-Scale Conditions. o. D7367, Standard Test Method for Determining Water Holding Capacity of Fiber Mulches for Hydraulic Planting. 3. Department of Ecology (ECY), State of Washington. 2019 Stormwater Management Manual for Western Washington (SWMMWW). 4. National Weather Service: a. Precipitation-Frequency of the United States by State/Territory, 2012. b. Precipitation Frequency Data Server, 2012. 5. North American Weed Management Association (NAWMA). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 6. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service: Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds; 1986. Technical Release 55. 7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency: a. Developing Your Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: A Guide for Construction Sites, 2007. EPA-833-R-06-004. b. National Menu of BMPs, 2012. 8. The sections of the standards referenced above which apply to this Project include, but are not limited to: Standard Specification or Detail No. Symbol Title WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C125 Compost Sock WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C103 High Visibility Fence WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C220 Inlet Protection WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C150 Materials on Hand WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C102 Natural Buffer or Equivalent WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C123 Plastic Covering WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C233 Silt (Sediment) Fence WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C105 Stabilized Construction Entrance WA 2019 SWMMWW ECY BMP C235 Wattles CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Erosion and Sediment Control: Provide, maintain, and operate temporary facilities to control erosion and sediment releases during construction period. B. Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead: 1. Identify the ESC Lead at the preconstruction discussions and in the TESC Plan. The ESC Lead shall have certification in construction site erosion and sediment control from a course approved by Owner. 2. The ESC Lead shall implement the TESC Plan, including, but not limited to: a. Installing and maintaining all temporary erosion and sediment control Best Management Practices (BMPs) included in the TESC Plan to assure continued performance of their intended function. Damaged or inadequate TESC BMPs shall be corrected immediately. b. Updating TESC Plan to reflect current field conditions. c. Terminating TESC Plan. 3. When a TESC Plan is included in the Contract Plans, ESC Lead shall also inspect all areas disturbed by construction activities, all onsite erosion and sediment control BMPs, all stormwater discharge points, and all temporarily stabilized inactive sites per schedule in the Construction Stormwater Discharge Permit(s) or as directed by Engineer. Complete erosion and sediment control inspection form provided by water resource agency or Owner for each inspection and submit a copy to Engineer no later than end of the next working day following inspection. C. Personnel Training: Prior to commencement of construction, applicable personnel must have an understanding of the Construction Stormwater Discharge Permit’s requirements and their specific responsibilities under the permit. At a minimum, personnel must be trained to understand the following as it relates to the scope of their job duties: 1. The location of all stormwater controls and how to maintain them. 2. Procedures for complying with the pollution prevention requirements. 3. Procedures for conducting inspections, recording findings, and taking corrective action. D. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan): 1. A TESC Plan is furnished as part of Drawings, which helps fulfill part of the plan requirement of the NPDES Permit. This initial TESC Plan, CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS when adopted by Contractor, may be used as the basis of the construction TESC Plan. Additional or revised erosion and sediment control features, not shown on the initial TESC Plan, may be required depending on Contractor’s methods of operation and schedule. 2. For each phase of the scheduled work, indicate on the TESC Plan all the BMPs proposed and installed for erosion and sediment control to minimize clearing, stabilize exposed soil, divert or temporarily store flows, limit runoff from exposed areas, and filter transported sediment. Include all temporary slopes, constructed for staging or other reasons, which may not have been identified in the original Contract plans. Refer to the current local jurisdiction’s erosion and sediment control manual. 3. Some TESC Plan required elements typically required by NPDES permits: a. Narrative Site Description: 1) Nature of construction activity planned for the Site. 2) Estimates of total site area and the areas of the Site expected to be disturbed. 3) Soil types found onsite and their erosion potential. 4) The types of fill materials to be used. 5) Timetable for sequence of major construction events. b. Site Map: 1) All areas of development. 2) Drainage patterns. 3) Areas of soil disturbance, including pre-development and post-development elevation contours. 4) Areas used for storage of soils or wastes. 5) Areas where vegetative practices are to be implemented. 6) Location of all erosion and sediment control BMP or structures. 7) Location of all impervious structures and surfaces after Project is completed. 8) Springs, wetlands, and other surface waters located onsite. 9) Boundaries of the 100-year floodplain, if determined. 10) Ordinary High Water line, if determined. 11) Location of storm drainage outfalls to receiving waters, if applicable. 12) Details of sediment and erosion controls. 13) Details of detention ponds, storm drain piping, inflow and outflow details. c. Required BMPs and Procedures for Erosion Prevention, Runoff Control, and Sediment Control: 1) Construction entrances and parking areas. 2) Unpaved site roads such as haul roads. 3) Hauling saturated soils from the Site. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4) Water washed from concrete trucks. 5) Correct installation of erosion and sediment control BMPs. 6) Prompt maintenance and repair of BMPs. 7) Clearing and grading practices to minimize area of exposed soil throughout life of the Project. 8) Schedule of phased clearing operations to limit soils to what can be stabilized. 9) Vegetative practices, including preservation of existing vegetation, seeding, mulching, and buffer strips. 10) Preventing erosion of exposed areas. 11) Diverting flows from exposed slopes. 12) Limiting runoff from exposed areas. 13) Limiting sediment transport within work sites and keeping it from moving off of project areas. 14) Perimeter controls for all clearing and grubbing, both planned and installed. 15) Additional controls for wet season work and temporary work suspensions. 16) Sensitive areas such as wetlands. 17) Offsite material source and waste areas. 18) Dust. 19) Emergency materials stockpiled onsite. 20) Storing flows and filtering sediment. 21) Soil stockpiles. 4. Contractor’s construction TESC Plan and implementation schedules must be prepared by a competent individual. Furnish a signed copy of the TESC Plan with individual’s name, title, state certifications, and employing firm if different than Contractor’s firm. 5. Do not begin any Site activities that have potential to cause erosion or sediment movement until the TESC Plan and implementation schedules are approved by Engineer. 6. Keep a copy of the approved TESC Plan with updated changes onsite during all construction activities. During inactive periods longer than 7 calendar days, keep the TESC Plan onsite or provide a copy to Engineer to retain. 7. Continually update the TESC Plan and schedules as needed for unexpected storm or other events to ensure that sediment-laden water does not leave the construction site. Add approved changes to the TESC Plan no later than 24 hours after implementation. E. Install high visibility fence along the Site no work areas shown on Drawings or as instructed by Engineer. Space posts and attach fence fabric to posts as shown on Drawings. Do not fasten fence to trees. Throughout the life of the CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Project, preserve and protect delineated area, acting immediately to repair or restore any fencing damaged or removed. F. Preventing erosion, and controlling runoff, sedimentation, and non-stormwater pollution, requires Contractor to perform temporary Work items including, but not limited to: 1. Providing ditches, berms, culverts, and other measures to control surface water. 2. Building dams, settling basins, energy dissipaters, and other measures, to control downstream flows. 3. Controlling underground water found during construction. 4. Covering or otherwise protecting slopes until permanent erosion control measures are working. G. To the degree possible, coordinate this temporary Work with permanent drainage and erosion control work the Contract requires. H. Engineer may require additional temporary control measures if it appears pollution or erosion may result from weather, nature of materials, or progress on the Work. I. When natural elements rut or erode the slope, restore and repair damage with eroded material where possible, and remove and dispose of any remaining material found in ditches and culverts. When Engineer orders replacement with additional or other materials, unit Contract prices will cover quantities needed. J. Install all sediment control devices including, but not limited to, sediment ponds, perimeter silt fencing, or other sediment trapping BMPs prior to any ground disturbing activity. Do not expose more erodible earth than necessary during clearing, grubbing, excavation, borrow, or fill activities without written approval by Engineer. Engineer may increase or decrease the limits based on project conditions. Erodible earth is defined as any surface where soils, grindings, or other materials may be capable of being displaced and transported by rain, wind, or surface water runoff. Cover inactive areas of erodible earth, whether at final grade or not, within specified time period (see [NPDES] Erosion and Sediment Control Permit), using an approved soil covering practice. Phase clearing and grading to maximum extent practical to prevent exposed inactive areas from becoming a source of erosion. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS K. Water Management: 1. Manage site water in accordance with the conditions of the waste discharge permit from a local permitting authority. If site water management is not subject to permit, manage as follows: a. Groundwater. When groundwater is encountered in an excavation, treat and discharge as follows: 1) Dewatering fluids may bypass detention and treatment facilities and be routed directly to the sanitary sewer. b. Process Water: 1) Do not discharge high pH process water or wastewater (non- stormwater) that is generated onsite, including water generated during concrete grinding, rubblizing, washout, and hydrodemolition activities, to waters of the Washington State, including wetlands. Water may be infiltrated upon approval of Engineer. Offsite disposal of concrete process water is subject to approval of Engineer. 2) Treat all water generated onsite from construction or washing activities that is more turbid than site runoff separately until turbidity is the same or less than site runoff, and then it may be combined with site runoff and treated as described above. Water may be infiltrated upon approval of Engineer. c. Offsite Water: Prior to disruption of normal watercourse, intercept offsite stormwater and pipe it either through or around the Project Site. This water shall not be combined with onsite stormwater. Discharge offsite water at its preconstruction outfall point preventing an increase in erosion below the Site. Submit proposed method for performing this Work for Engineer’s approval. L. Dispersion/Infiltration: Convey water only to dispersion or infiltration areas designated in the TESC Plan or to sites approved by Engineer. Water shall be conveyed to designated dispersion areas at a rate such that, when runoff leaves the area and enters waters of the Washington State, turbidity standards are achieved. Convey water to designated infiltration areas at a rate that does not produce surface runoff. M. Detention/Retention Pond Construction: Whether permanent or temporary, construct before beginning other grading and excavation Work in the area that drains into that pond. Install temporary conveyances concurrently with grading in accordance with the TESC Plan so that newly graded areas drain to the pond as they are exposed. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS N. Pollution Control: Use BMPs to prevent or minimize stormwater exposure to pollutants from spills; vehicle and equipment fueling, maintenance, and storage; other cleaning and maintenance activities; and waste handling activities. These pollutants include fuel, hydraulic fluid, and other oils from vehicles and machinery, as well as debris, leftover paints, solvents, and glues from construction operations. Implement the following BMPs when applicable: 1. Written spill prevention and response procedures. 2. Employee training on spill prevention and proper disposal procedures. 3. Spill kits in all vehicles. 4. Regular maintenance schedule for vehicles and machinery. 5. Material delivery and storage controls. 6. Training and signage. 7. Covered storage areas for waste and supplies. O. If Engineer orders the Work suspended, continue to control erosion, pollution, and runoff during the shutdown. P. Nothing in this section shall relieve Contractor from complying with other Contract requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. When a TESC Plan is included on Drawings, either adopt or modify the TESC Plan. Provide a schedule for TESC Plan implementation and incorporate it into Contractor’s progress schedule. Obtain Engineer’s approval of the TESC Plan and schedule before any Work begins. 2. Modified TESC Plans shall meet all requirements of the applicable jurisdictions. 3. The TESC Plan shall cover all areas that may be affected inside and outside the limits of the Project (including all Owner-provided sources, disposal sites, and haul roads, and all nearby land, streams, and other bodies of water). 4. Allow at least 5 working days for Engineer to review any original or revised TESC Plan. Failure to approve all or part of any such Plan shall not make Owner liable to Contractor for any Work delays. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 10 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPOST SOCK A. Provide socks fabricated from of extra heavy weight biodegradable fabric, with a minimum strand thickness of 5 mils. B. Fill fabric with Coarse Compost. C. Diameter: 8 inches minimum. D. Fabric: Clean, evenly woven, and free of encrusted concrete or other contaminating materials. Shall be free from cuts, tears, broken or missing yarns. Shall be free of thin, open, or weak areas. Shall be free of any type of preservative. E. Wood Stakes: Untreated softwood species, be 2-inch by 2-inch nominal dimension and 36 inches in length. 2.02 GEOTEXTILE A. Geotextiles shall consist only of long chain polymeric fibers or yarns formed into a stable network such that the fibers or yarns retain their position relative to each other during handling, placement, and design service life. At least 95 percent by weight of the material shall be polyolefins or polyesters. The material shall be free from defects or tears. Geotextile shall also be free of any treatment or coating which might adversely alter its hydraulic or physical properties after installation. Geotextile properties shall be as specified as described in Table 1 through Table 3. Table 1 Geotextile for Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile Property ASTM Test Method Geotextile Property Requirements Permanent Erosion Control Ditch Lining Moderate Survivability High Survivability Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven AOS D4751 See Table 2 See Table 2 U.S. No. 30 max. Water Permittivity D4491 See Table 2 See Table 2 0.02 sec-1 min. Grab Tensile Strength, in machine and x-machine direction D4632/ D4632M 250 lb min. 160 1b min. 315 lb min. 200 lb min. 250 lb min. 160 lb min. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Table 1 Geotextile for Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile Property ASTM Test Method Geotextile Property Requirements Permanent Erosion Control Ditch Lining Moderate Survivability High Survivability Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven Grab Failure Strain, in machine and x-machine direction D4632/ D4632M 15% -50% 50% 15% -50% 50% <50% 50% Seam Breaking Strength D4632/ D4632M 220 lb min. 140 lb min. 270 lb min. 180 lb min. 220 lb min. 140 lb min. Puncture Resistance D6241 495 lb min. 310 lb min. 620 lb min. 430 lb min. 495 lb min. 310 lb min. Tear Strength, in machine and x- machine direction D4533 80 lb min. 50 lb min. 112 lb min. 79 lb min. 80 lb min. 50 lb min. Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation Stability D4355 70% strength retained min., after 500 hours in xenon arc device Table 2 Filtration Properties for Geotextile for Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile Property ASTM Test Method Geotextile Property Requirements Class A Class B Class C AOS D4751 U.S. No. 40 max. U.S. No. 60 max. U.S. No. 70 max. Water Permittivity D4491 0.7 sec-1 min. 0.4 sec-1 min. 0.2 sec-1 min. Table 3 Geotextile for Temporary Silt Fence Geotextile Property ASTM Test Method Geotextile Property Requirements Unsupported Between Posts Supported Between Posts with Wire or Polymeric Mesh AOS D4751 U.S. No. 30 max. for silt wovens, U.S. No. 50 for all other geotextile types, U.S. No. 100 min. Water Permittivity D4491 0.2 sec-1 min. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 12 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Table 3 Geotextile for Temporary Silt Fence Geotextile Property ASTM Test Method Geotextile Property Requirements Unsupported Between Posts Supported Between Posts with Wire or Polymeric Mesh Grab Tensile Strength, in machine and x- machine direction D4632/ D4632M 180 lb min. in machine direction, 100 lb min. in x-machine direction 100 lb min. Grab Failure Strain, in machine and x-machine direction D4632/ D4632M 30% max. at 180 lb or more Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation Stability D4355 70% strength retained min., after 500 hours in xenon arc device 2.03 HIGH VISIBILITY FENCING A. High Visibility Fence: UV stabilized, orange, high-density polyethylene or polypropylene mesh. B. Height: 4 feet minimum. C. Support Posts: Wood or steel with sufficient strength and durability to support the fence through the life of the Project. 2.04 INLET PROTECTION A. As specified under Article Geotextile. 2.05 PLASTIC COVERING A. Clear plastic meeting requirements of ASTM D4397 for polyethylene sheeting having a minimum thickness of 6 mils. 2.06 SEDIMENT CONTROL BARRIERS A. Specified by Contractor with approval of Engineer. May include Compost Filter Sock. 2.07 SILT (SEDIMENT) FENCE A. Geotextile: As specified in Article Geotextile. B. Reinforcing: Welded wire fabric, 14-gauge minimum with 2-inch by 4-inch mesh. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Support Posts: As recommended by manufacturer of geotextile. D. Fasteners: Heavy-duty wire staples at least 1-inch long, tie wires, or hog rings, as recommended by manufacturer of geotextile. 2.08 STRAW BALE BARRIER A. Straw: 1. Air dried condition free of noxious weeds, seeds, and other materials detrimental to plant life. Hay is not acceptable. Provide weed-free documentation: a. Certified Weed Free Straw using North American Weed Management Association (NAWMA) standards. b. Provide documentation that material is steam or heat treated to kill seeds. c. Provide U.S. or state’s Department of Agriculture laboratory test reports, dated within 90 days prior to date of application, showing there are no viable seeds in the straw. B. Straw Mulch: Suitable for spreading with mulch blower equipment. C. Posts for Straw Bales: 2-inch by 2-inch untreated wood or commercially manufactured metal posts. 2.09 STREET CLEANING A. Use self-propelled pickup street sweeper(s). Mechanical broom sweepers are not allowed where environmental concerns exist about storm water pollution or air quality. 2.10 TEMPORARY CURB A. Temporary curbs may consist of asphalt, concrete, sand bags, compost socks, wattles, or geotextile/plastic encased berms of sand or gravel, or as approved by Engineer. 2.11 WATTLES A. Cylinders of biodegradable plant material such as weed-free straw, coir, compost, wood chips, excelsior, or wood fiber or shavings encased within biodegradable netting. B. Diameter: 5 inches minimum. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 14 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Netting Material: Clean, evenly woven, and free of encrusted concrete or other contaminating materials such as preservatives. Also free from cuts, tears, or weak places with a minimum lifespan of 6 months. D. Compost Filler: Coarse compost, wood chips, or wood shavings. E. Wood Stakes: Untreated softwood species, 2-inch by 2-inch nominal dimension and 36 inches in length. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Engineer’s acceptance of the TESC Plan is required prior to starting earth disturbing activities. B. Include proposed stockpile areas and installation of temporary erosion control devices, ditches, or other facilities in Work phasing plans. C. Areas designated for Contractor’s use during Project may be temporarily developed as specified to provide working, staging, and administrative areas. Include control of sediment from these areas in the TESC Plan. D. Compost Sock: Exercise care when installing compost socks to ensure method of installation minimizes disturbance of waterways and prevents sediment or pollutant discharge into waterbodies. Lace compost socks together, end-to- end, with coir rope to create a continuous length. Bury loose ends of continuous length 3 feet to 5 feet laterally into the bankslope. Install the upper surface of compost sock parallel to slope. Provide finished grades of a natural appearance with smooth transitions. Secure compost sock with wood stakes or live stakes of species as indicated on Drawings. Drive stakes into place centered on top of compost sock and spaced 3 feet on center throughout length of sock. E. High Visibility Fencing: Install high visibility fencing in accordance with Drawings. F. Inlet Protection: Install inlet protection below or above, or as a prefabricated cover at each inlet grate, as shown on Drawings. Install inlet protection devices prior to beginning clearing, grubbing or earthwork activities. Geotextile fabric used in prefabricated inlet protection devices must meet or exceed the requirements for Moderate Survivability and minimum filtration properties. When depth of accumulated sediment and debris reaches approximately one-half the height of an internal device or one-third the height CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS of external device (or less when so specified by the manufacturers) or as designated by Engineer, remove deposits and stabilize onsite. 1. Below Inlet Grate: a. Prefabricated units specifically designed for inlet protection. b. Must remain securely attached to drainage structure when fully loaded with sediment and debris or at the maximum level of sediment and debris specified by manufacturer. 2. Above Inlet Grate: a. Devices may be silt fence, sandbags, or prefabricated units specifically designed for inlet protection. b. Must remain securely in place around drainage structure under all conditions. 3. Inlet Grate Cover: a. Prefabricated units specifically designed for inlet protection and: 1) Be a sewn geotextile fabric unit fitted to individual grate and completely enclosing grate. 2) Have built-in lifting devices to allow manual access of stormwater system. 3) Use an orange monofilament geotextile fabric. b. Check dams or functionally equivalent devices may be used as inlet protection devices with approval of Engineer. G. Plastic Covering: Use clear plastic covering to promote seed germination when seeding is performed outside of specified dates. Use black plastic covering for stockpiles or other areas where vegetative growth is unwanted. Place plastic with at least a 12-inch overlap of all seams. Install and maintain plastic cover tolon prevent water from cutting under the plastic and to prevent cover from blowing open in the wind. H. Sediment Control Barriers: Install sediment control barriers in accordance with TESC Plan or manufacturer’s recommendations in the areas of clearing, grubbing, earthwork, or drainage prior to starting those activities. Maintain sediment control barriers until soils are stabilized. I. Silt (Sediment) Fence: 1. Silt fence shall be installed in accordance with Drawings. When backup support is used, use steel wire with a maximum mesh spacing of 2 inches by 4 inches, or plastic mesh as resistant to ultraviolet radiation as the geotextile it supports. Provide wire or plastic mesh with strength equivalent to or greater than as required for unsupported geotextile (for example, 180 pounds grab tensile strength in the machine direction). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 16 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Attach geotextile to posts and support system using staples, wire, or in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Geotextile shall be sewn together at the point of manufacture, or at a location approved by Engineer, to form geotextile lengths as required. 3. Provide wood or steel support posts at sewn seams and overlaps and as shown on Drawings and necessary to support fence. 4. Wood Posts: Minimum dimensions of 1-1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch by the minimum length shown on Drawings. 5. Steel Posts: Minimum weight of 0.90 lb/ft. 6. When sediment deposits reach approximately one-third the height of the silt fence, remove and stabilize deposits. J. Street Cleaning: Use self-propelled pickup street sweepers whenever required by Engineer to prevent transport of sediment and other debris off Project Site. Provide street sweepers designed and operated to meet air quality standards. Street washing with water will require approval by Engineer. Intentional washing of sediment into storm sewers or drainage ways must not occur. Vacuuming or dry sweeping and material pickup must be used to cleanup released sediments. K. Temporary Curb: Provide temporary curbs to divert or redirect water around erodible soils. Temporary curbs shall be installed along pavement edges to prevent runoff from flowing onto erodible slopes. Water shall be directed to areas where erosion can be controlled. Temporary curbs shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height. Ponding shall not be in roadways. L. Wattles: Install wattles as soon as construction will allow or when designated by Engineer. Begin trench construction and wattle installation at base of slope and work uphill. Spread excavated material evenly along the uphill slope and compact using hand tamping or other method approved by Engineer. On gradually sloped or clay-type soils, provide trenches 2 inches to 3 inches deep. On loose soils, in high rainfall areas, or on steep slopes, provide trenches 3 inches to 5 inches deep, or half the thickness of the wattle. Exercise care when installing wattles to minimize disturbance of waterways and prevent sediment or pollutant discharge into waterbodies. 3.02 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Natural Buffer or Equivalent: 1. Unless natural buffer between the Project Site and receiving waters has previously been eliminated by pre-existing development disturbances, CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS comply with one of the following alternatives if stormwater from construction will discharge to surface water: a. Provide a 50-foot, undisturbed natural buffer between construction disturbances and surface water. b. Provide an undisturbed natural buffer that is less than 50 feet supplemented by additional erosion and sediment controls, which in combination, achieve a sediment load reduction that is equivalent to a 50-foot buffer. c. If it is infeasible to provide an undisturbed natural buffer of any size, implement erosion and sediment controls that achieve a sediment load reduction that is equivalent to a 50-foot buffer. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. The ESCP measures described in this specification are minimum requirements for anticipated Site conditions. During the construction period, upgrade these measures as needed to comply with all applicable local, state, and federal erosion and sediment control regulations. B. Maintain erosion and sediment control BMPs so they properly perform their function until Engineer determines they are no longer needed. C. Construction activities must avoid or minimize excavation and creation of bare ground during wet weather. D. The intentional washing of sediment into storm sewers or drainage ways must not occur. Vacuuming or dry sweeping and material pickup must be used to cleanup released sediments. E. Inspect BMPs in accordance with the schedule in the Construction Stormwater Discharge Permit(s) or as directed by Engineer. F. Complete an inspection report within 24 hours of an inspection. Each inspection report shall be signed and identify corrective actions. Document that corrective actions are performed within 7 days of identification. Keep a copy of all inspection reports at the Site or at an easily accessible location. G. Unless otherwise specified, remove deposits before the depth of accumulated sediment and debris reaches approximately height of BMP. Dispose of debris or contaminated sediment at approved locations. Clean sediments may be stabilized onsite using BMPs as approved by Engineer. H. Sediment Fence: Remove trapped sediment before it reaches one-third of the above ground fence height and before fence removal. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 13 - 18 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS I. Other Sediment Barriers (such as biobags): Remove sediment before it reaches 2 inches depth above ground height and before BMP removal. J. Catch Basins: Clean before retention capacity has been reduced by 50 percent. K. Sediment Basins and Sediment Traps: Remove trapped sediments before design capacity has been reduced by 50 percent and at completion of Project. L. Initiate repair or replacement of damaged erosion and sediment control BMPs immediately, and work completed by end of next work day. Significant replacement or repair must be completed within 7 days, unless infeasible. M. Within 24 hours, remediate any significant sediment that has left construction site. Investigate cause of the sediment release and implement steps to prevent a recurrence of discharge within same 24 hours. Perform in-stream cleanup of sediment according to applicable regulations. N. Stabilize or cover soil stockpiles or implement other BMPs to prevent discharges to surface waters or conveyance systems leading to surface waters consistent with SWMMWW. O. Temporarily stabilize soils at end of shift before holidays and weekends, if needed. Ensure soils are stable during rain events at all times of year. P. Initiate stabilization by no later than end of next work day after construction work in an area has stopped permanently or temporarily. Q. Provide permanent erosion control measures on all exposed areas. Do not remove temporary sediment control practices until permanent vegetation or other cover of exposed areas is established. However, do remove all temporary erosion control measures as exposed areas become stabilized, unless doing so conflicts with local requirements. Properly dispose of construction materials and waste, including sediment retained by temporary BMPs. 3.04 EMERGENCY MATERIALS A. Provide, stockpile, and protect emergency erosion and sediment control materials on the Project Site for unknown weather or erosion conditions. Emergency materials are in addition to other erosion control materials required to implement and maintain the TESC Plan. Replenish emergency CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 13 - 19 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS materials as they are used. Remove all unused emergency materials from the Project Site at completion of the Project. 3.05 REMOVAL A. When Engineer determines that an erosion control BMP is no longer required, remove BMP and all associated hardware from the Project limits. When materials are biodegradable, Engineer may approve leaving temporary BMP in place. B. Permanently stabilize all bare and disturbed soil after removal of erosion and sediment control BMPs. Dress sediment deposits remaining after BMPs have been removed to conform to existing grade. Prepare and seed graded area. If installation and use of erosion control BMPs have compacted or otherwise rendered soil inhospitable to plant growth, such as construction entrances, take measures to rehabilitate soil to facilitate plant growth. This may include, but is not limited to, ripping the soil, incorporating soil amendments, or seeding with specified seed. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 28 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 57 28 TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Inspection, Cleaning, and Restoration Certification (IICRC): S500, Standard and Reference Guide for Professional Water Damage Restoration. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Bypass Pumping: Temporary flow control accomplished by diverting flow around the Work area using one or more pumps. B. Temporary Flow Control: Reducing, limiting, or excluding flow in or to a sanitary sewer, storm sewer, pump station, force main, or other facility as required for performing the Work under the Contract. Draining, handling, and disposal of sanitary sewage and stormwater from pipelines and other facilities as required for performing the Work under the Contract is also part of temporary flow control. C. Temporary Flow Control Plan: Plan prepared by Contractor containing complete information on how Contractor proposes to perform temporary flow control in accordance with specified requirements. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide facilities and controls required to intercept, convey, and discharge flow to be controlled; include standby and emergency equipment. B. Conform to regulatory requirements. C. Protect water resources, wetlands, and other natural resources. D. Temporary flow control shall be done in a manner that will not damage private or public property, or create a nuisance or public menace. Flow shall be conveyed in enclosed pipes that are adequately protected from traffic or other hazards. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 28 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS E. Discharge: 1. To sanitary sewer system at the location identified on Drawings. 2. Dumping or free flow on private or public property, gutters, streets, or sidewalks is prohibited. 3. Discharge of sanitary sewage to storm sewers, to surface waters or wetlands, or into the ground, is prohibited. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Obtain approval and secure permits for placement of temporary flow control facilities within public right-of-ways. B. Existing facilities in the vicinity of the Gaines Street Pump Station are shown on Drawings including manhole for intercepting upstream flows and the existing connection point for conveying flows downstream to the wastewater treatment plant. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Temporary Flow Control Plan. 2. Emergency Cleanup Plan. 3. Names and qualifications of standby cleanup Subcontractor. 4. Information describing equipment and materials to be used and showing conformance with specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Temporary Flow Control System Designer: Professional engineer who has at least 5 years’ experience in design of such systems and who is registered in the State of Washington. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. After approval of all plan and other required submittals, the Contractor can proceed with implementing sewage bypass. Installation of the sewage bypass system will require that the street closure be completed ahead of time and necessary approvals obtained as specified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 28 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Coordinate all sewage bypass work with the Owner and obtain approval to proceed with each step prior to implementing the plan in the field. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install temporary flow control facilities only within public right-of-way, Owner’s property, temporary construction easement, permanent easement, or easement obtained by Contractor. B. Operate and maintain temporary flow control 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, including without limitation, holidays, as required to control flows. C. Promptly remove temporary flow control facilities as soon as they are no longer needed. 3.02 REQUIRED TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL A. Eliminate flow to the pump station during the wet well construction within that segment. B. Intercept sewage flow at the two manholes as shown on Drawings. Handle maximum flows from each sewer up to 1,200 gpm each at 70 feet TDH with up to approximately 24 feet of suction lift to grade. Provide for standby, redundant pumping in case of problems with one of the bypass pumps. 3.03 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide materials and equipment that will ensure continuous and successful operation of temporary flow control systems. 2. Repair or modify systems as necessary. 3. Unless otherwise shown or specified, materials and equipment may be new or used at Contractor’s option. B. Plugs: 1. Provide with taps for connection of pressure gauges and air hoses, and flow-through capability. 2. Pipe Diameters 24 Inches and Smaller: Use mechanical plugs with rubber gaskets or pneumatic plugs with rubber boots. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 28 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Pipe Diameters Larger than 24 Inches: a. Use inflatable bag stoppers made in two or more pieces. b. Manufacturers: 1) Lansas. 2) Cherne Industries. C. Pumps: 1. Fully automatic, self-priming units that do not require use of foot valves or vacuum pumps in priming system. 2. Solids handling design with ability to pump minimum 3-inch diameter sphere. 3. Able to run dry for long periods of time to accommodate cyclical nature of flows. 4. Engine: Equipped to minimize noise. Noise levels shall not exceed 86 dBA at a distance of 50 feet from source. D. Electric Power Generators: 1. Be able to simultaneously start and run electric powered pumps required for flow to be controlled. 2. Equipped to minimize noise. Noise levels shall not exceed 86 dBA at a distance of 50 feet from source. 3. Include automatic transfer switch if flow control system is to operate unattended. E. Standby Equipment: 1. Standby Pump: One of each size to be available onsite. 2. Electric Power Generators: Minimum of one if temporary flow control system contains electric powered pump. Able to simultaneously start and run electric powered pumps required for flow to be controlled. 3.04 TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL PLAN A. Prepare and submit Temporary Flow Control Plan at least 14 days before starting the Work requiring temporary flow control; include following information: 1. Drawings indicating location of temporary sewer plugs and bypass discharge lines. 2. Locations where flow will be intercepted and discharged. 3. Complete descriptions and performance characteristics of pumps, electric power generators, and standby equipment. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL JULY 2021 01 57 28 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. Acoustical information for equipment to be used showing compliance with noise control requirements of Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Control. 5. Details of temporary force mains, including horizontal and vertical alignments, pipe materials, protection of existing buried and aboveground facilities and improvements, maintenance of traffic and access to properties. 6. Design calculations proving adequacy of temporary system and selected equipment to convey all flows. 7. Drawings showing layouts and configurations of temporary flow control facilities and also showing locations relative to right-of-way easement, and property boundaries. 8. Drawings and design calculations of temporary bulkheads and plugs. 9. Drawings and design calculations for thrust restraint of temporary piping. 10. Details of system controls and control logic; include diagrams and narrative. 11. Anticipated schedule for the Work. 12. Other information to completely describe temporary flow control facilities and conformance to specified requirements. 13. Anticipate coordination needs with the Public Works Department. 3.05 EMERGENCY CLEANUP PLAN A. Prepare and submit not less than 14 days before scheduled date of temporary flow control activities. As a minimum plan shall include the following: 1. Procedures for removal of water. 2. Procedures for determining nature and extent of damage and required restoration where restoration is possible. 3. Provide for standby Subcontractor for cleanup of exterior spaces that might be affected by a spill, backup, or overflow. 3.06 BLOCKING FLOW A. Flow control may consist of blocking flow with mechanical or pneumatic plugs to prevent flow into work areas. B. Use primary and secondary plugs for each flow control location. 3.07 PIPING A. Minimize disturbance of existing utilities. B. Installation of bypass pipelines is prohibited in salt marsh/wetland areas. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT TEMPORARY FLOW CONTROL PW\DEN003\709275 01 57 28 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Pressure Test for Pump Bypass Systems: 1. Prior to operation, test each section of discharge piping with maximum pressure equal to 1.5 times maximum operating pressure of system. 2. Notify Engineer and Owner 24 hours prior to testing. B. Full Scale Test: 1. At least 14 days prior to test, notify Engineer and Owner of date and time of test. 2. Do not begin temporary flow control activities until successful test has been completed. 3. Conduct on proposed temporary flow control at least 7 days before scheduled date of actual proposed temporary flow control. 4. Purpose of test is to demonstrate capability, function, and reliability of Contractor’s proposed method of temporary flow control. 5. Duration: Minimum of 4 hours. 6. Conduct between 8:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Do not conduct test on Saturday, Sunday, or holiday. 7. If electric pumps are being used, provide standby generators to ensure continuity of pumping operation in event of power failure. 8. Demonstrate system controls and operation, reliability, and transfer to standby equipment during test. 9. Conduct until flow is accommodated for minimum specified test duration. 10. Failure: a. Test shall be deemed to have failed if during test flows are not accommodated for whatever reason and for whatever length of time. b. If test fails, determine and correct deficiencies that caused test to fail and conduct another Full Scale Test. 11. Determination by Engineer of a successful test, permission by Engineer to proceed with the Work requiring temporary flow control, or anything else shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility to provide temporary flow control. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2021 01 61 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 61 00 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Products: 1. New items for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased by Contractor or Owner for the Project, or taken from previously purchased stock, and may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. 2. Includes the terms material, equipment, machinery, components, subsystem, system, hardware, software, and terms of similar intent and is not intended to change meaning of such other terms used in Contract Documents, as those terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in construction industry. 3. Items identified by manufacturer’s product name, including make or model designation, indicated in manufacturer’s published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Where Contractor design is specified, design of installation, systems, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in accordance with provisions of latest edition of International Building Code (IBC) by International Code Council. 1. Seismic: Use Group U, importance factor, I, of 1.25, Site Class Definition D, mapped maximum considered earthquake, 5 percent damped, spectral response at short periods, Ss 1.32, mapped maximum considered earthquake, 5 percent damped, spectral response at a period of 1 second, S1 0.535, unless specified otherwise. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Altitude: Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and operation under rated conditions at 13 feet above sea level. B. Provide equipment and devices installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures capable of continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of 28 degrees F to 82 degrees F and internal wetwell temperature range of 35 degrees F to 70 degrees F. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PW\DEN003\709275 01 61 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.04 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. When practical, factory assemble products. Mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable protective coating. B. Package products to facilitate handling and protect from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate its purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by name, name of Project and Contractor, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing list and bill of materials with each shipment. C. Extra Materials, Special Tools, Test Equipment, and Expendables: 1. Furnish as required by individual Specifications. 2. Schedule: a. Ensure that shipment and delivery occurs concurrent with shipment of associated equipment. b. Transfer to Owner shall occur immediately subsequent to Contractor’s acceptance of equipment from Supplier. 3. Packaging and Shipment: a. Package and ship extra materials and special tools to avoid damage during long term storage in original cartons insofar as possible, or in appropriately sized, hinged-cover, wood, plastic, or metal box. b. Prominently displayed on each package, the following: 1) Manufacturer’s part nomenclature and number, consistent with Operation and Maintenance Manual identification system. 2) Applicable equipment description. 3) Quantity of parts in package. 4) Equipment manufacturer. 4. Deliver materials to Site. 5. Notify Engineer, Owner, and Construction Manager upon arrival for transfer of materials. 6. Replace extra materials and special tools found to be damaged or otherwise inoperable at time of transfer to Owner. D. Request a minimum 7-day advance notice of shipment from manufacturer. Upon receipt of manufacturer’s advance notice of shipment, promptly notify Engineer and Owner of anticipated date of equipment arrival. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2021 01 61 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS E. Factory Test Results: Reviewed and accepted by Engineer and Owner before product shipment as required in individual Specification sections. 1.05 DELIVERY AND INSPECTION A. Deliver products in accordance with accepted current Progress Schedule and coordinate to avoid conflict with the Work and conditions at Site. B. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. Include on label, date of manufacture and shelf life, where applicable. C. Unload products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for unloading or as specified. Record receipt of products at Site. Promptly inspect for completeness and evidence of damage during shipment. D. Remove damaged products from Site and expedite delivery of identical new undamaged products, and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that specified, so as not to delay progress of the Work. 1.06 HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in a manner to prevent damage. Store in approved storage yards or sheds provided in accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance during storage, installation, and until products are accepted for use by Owner. B. Manufacturer’s instructions for material requiring special handling, storage, or protection shall be provided prior to delivery of material. C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to ensure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. Keep running account of products in storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for products delivered, but not installed in the Work. D. Store electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and equipment with bearings in weather-tight structures maintained above 60 degrees F. Protect electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and insulate against moisture, water, and dust damage. E. Store fabricated products above ground on blocking or skids, and prevent soiling or staining. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter. Cover products that are subject CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PW\DEN003\709275 01 61 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. F. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well-ventilated areas. Do not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity. G. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage due to traffic and construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed. H. Hazardous Materials: Prevent contamination of personnel, storage area, and Site. Meet requirements of product specification, codes, and manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer’s standard materials suitable for service conditions, unless otherwise specified in the individual Specifications. B. Where product specifications include a named manufacturer, with or without model number, and also include performance requirements, named manufacturer’s products must meet the performance specifications. C. Like items of products furnished and installed in the Work shall be end products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts and replacement, manufacturer’s services, and implement same or similar process instrumentation and control functions in same or similar manner. D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by Contract Documents. E. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components, unless otherwise specified. F. Equipment, Components, Systems, and Subsystems: Design and manufacture with due regard for health and safety of operation, maintenance, and accessibility, durability of parts, and shall comply with applicable OSHA, state, and local health and safety regulations. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2021 01 61 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS G. Regulatory Requirement: Coating materials shall meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and for worker exposure. H. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. I. Equipment Finish: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard finish and color, except where specific color is indicated. 2. If manufacturer has no standard color, provide equipment with gray finish as approved by Owner. J. Special Tools and Accessories: Furnish to Owner, upon acceptance of equipment, all accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These accessory items include, but are not limited to, adequate oil and grease (as required for first lubrication of equipment after field testing), special tools, and other spare parts as required for maintenance. K. Lubricant: Provide initial lubricant recommended by equipment manufacturer in sufficient quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace consumption during testing, startup, and operation until final acceptance by Owner. 2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE A. General: 1. Manufacture parts to U.S.A. standard sizes and gauges. 2. Two or more items of the same type shall be identical, by the same manufacturer, and interchangeable. 3. Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads. 4. Use 1/4-inch minimum thickness for steel that will be submerged, wholly or partially, during normal operation. 5. Modify standard products as necessary to meet performance Specifications. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PW\DEN003\709275 01 61 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Lubrication System: 1. Require no more than quarterly attention during continuous operation. 2. Convenient and accessible; oil drains with bronze or stainless steel valves and fill-plugs easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Locate drains to allow convenient collection of oil during oil changes. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Where Specifications call for factory testing to be witnessed by Engineer, notify Engineer not less than 14 days prior to scheduled test date, unless otherwise specified. B. Calibration Instruments: Bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying instrument has been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). C. Factory Tests: Perform in accordance with accepted test procedures and document successful completion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect materials and equipment for signs of pitting, rust decay, or other deleterious effects of storage. Do not install material or equipment showing such effects. Remove damaged material or equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of identical new material or equipment. Delays to the Work resulting from material or equipment damage that necessitates procurement of new products will be considered delays within Contractor’s control. 3.02 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed in full, signed by entity supplying the product, material, or service, and submitted prior to shipment of product or material or execution of the services. B. Engineer may permit use of certain materials or assemblies prior to sampling and testing if accompanied by accepted certification of compliance. C. Such form shall certify proposed product, material, or service complies with that specified. Attach supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2021 01 61 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS D. May reflect recent or previous test results on material or product, if acceptable to Engineer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. B. No shimming between machined surfaces is allowed. C. Install the Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified. D. Repaint painted surfaces that are damaged prior to equipment acceptance. E. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. F. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as may be specified. Retain a copy of manufacturers’ instruction at Site, available for review at all times. 3.04 FIELD FINISHING A. In accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations for touchup painting and/or individual Specification sections. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Perform required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activities. 3.06 LUBRICANTS A. Fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner. 3.07 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section”, is part of this Specification. 1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2021 01 61 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE OWNER: PRODUCT, MATERIAL, OR SERVICE SUBMITTED: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NO: Comments: I hereby certify that the above-referenced product, material, or service called for by the Contract for the named Project will be furnished in accordance with all applicable requirements. I further certify that the product, material, or service are of the quality specified and conform in all respects with the Contract requirements, and are in the quantity shown. Date of Execution: ________________________________________, 20___ Manufacturer: Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative (print): (Authorized Signature) CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 77 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Submit prior to application for final payment. a. Record Documents: As required in General Conditions. b. Approved Shop Drawings and Samples: As required in the General Conditions. c. Special bonds, Special Guarantees, and Service Agreements. d. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: As required in General Conditions. e. Releases or Waivers of Liens and Claims: As required in General Conditions. f. Releases from Agreements. g. Final Application for Payment: Submit in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in Section 01 29 00, Payment Procedures. h. Extra Materials: As required by individual Specification sections. 1.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Quality Assurance: 1. Furnish qualified and experienced person, whose duty and responsibility shall be to maintain record documents. 2. Accuracy of Records: a. Coordinate changes within record documents, making legible and accurate entries on each sheet of Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show change. b. Purpose of Project record documents is to document factual information regarding aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive Site measurement, investigation, and examination. 3. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a change in the Work has occurred. 4. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, request Engineer’s review and approval of current status of record documents. Failure to properly maintain, update, and submit record documents may CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 77 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS result in a deferral by Engineer to recommend whole or any part of Contractor’s Application for Payment, either partial or final. 1.03 RELEASES FROM AGREEMENTS A. Furnish Owner written releases from property owners or public agencies where side agreements or special easements have been made, or where Contractor’s operations have not been kept within the Owner’s construction right-of-way. B. In the event Contractor is unable to secure written releases: 1. Inform Owner of the reasons. 2. Owner or its representatives will examine the Site, and Owner will direct Contractor to complete the Work that may be necessary to satisfy terms of the side agreement or special easement. 3. Should Contractor refuse to perform this Work, Owner reserves right to have it done by separate contract and deduct cost of same from Contract Price, or require Contractor to furnish a satisfactory bond in a sum to cover legal Claims for damages. 4. When Owner is satisfied that the Work has been completed in agreement with Contract Documents and terms of side agreement or special easement, right is reserved to waive requirement for written release if: (i) Contractor’s failure to obtain such statement is due to grantor’s refusal to sign, and this refusal is not based upon any legitimate Claims that Contractor has failed to fulfill terms of side agreement or special easement, or (ii) Contractor is unable to contact or has had undue hardship in contacting grantor. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: 1. Promptly following commencement of Contract Times, secure from Engineer at no cost to Contractor, one complete set of Contract Documents. Drawings will be full size. 2. Label or stamp each record document with title, “RECORD DOCUMENTS,” in neat large printed letters. 3. Record information concurrently with construction progress and within 24 hours after receipt of information that change has occurred. Do not cover or conceal Work until required information is recorded. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES JULY 2021 01 77 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Preservation: 1. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 2. Make documents and Samples available at all times for observation by Engineer. C. Making Entries on Drawings: 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe change by graphic line and note as required. a. Color Coding: 1) Green when showing information deleted from Drawings. 2) Red when showing information added to Drawings. 3) Blue and circled in blue to show notes. 2. Date entries. 3. Call attention to entry by “cloud” drawn around area or areas affected. 4. Legibly mark to record actual changes made during construction, including, but not limited to: a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished first floor data if not shown or where depth differs from that shown. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of existing and new Underground Facilities and appurtenances, and other underground structures, equipment, or Work. Reference to at least two measurements to permanent surface improvements. c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. d. Locate existing facilities, piping, equipment, and items critical to the interface between existing physical conditions or construction and new construction. e. Changes made by Addenda and Field Orders, Work Change Directive, Change Order, and Engineer’s written interpretation and clarification using consistent symbols for each and showing appropriate document tracking number. 5. Dimensions on Schematic Layouts: Show on record drawings, by dimension, the centerline of each run of items such as are described in previous subparagraph above. a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as “cast iron drain,” “galv. water,” and the like. b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item (“under slab,” “in ceiling plenum,” “exposed,” and the like). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PW\DEN003\709275 01 77 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS c. Make identification so descriptive that it may be related reliably to Specifications. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. At completion of the Work or of a part thereof and immediately prior to Contractor’s request for certificate of Substantial Completion; or if no certificate is issued, immediately prior to Contractor’s notice of completion, clean entire Site or parts thereof, as applicable. 1. Leave the Work and adjacent areas affected in a cleaned condition satisfactory to Owner. 2. Remove grease, dirt, dust, paint or plaster splatter, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exposed surfaces. 3. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent surfaces. 4. Broom clean exterior paved driveways and parking areas. 5. Hose clean sidewalks, loading areas, and others contiguous with principal structures. 6. Rake clean all other surfaces. 7. Remove snow and ice from access to buildings. 8. Leave water courses, gutters, and ditches open and clean. B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surfaces to be cleaned. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2021 01 78 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Detailed information for the preparation, submission, and Engineer’s review of Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Data, as required by individual Specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for Engineer’s review. B. Final Data: Engineer-accepted data, submitted as specified herein. C. Maintenance Operation: As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Equipment and System Data: 1. Preliminary Data: a. Do not submit until Shop Drawing for equipment or system has been reviewed and approved by Engineer. b. Submit prior to shipment date. 2. Final Data: Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than 30 days prior to equipment field functional testing. Submit Compilation Formatted and Electronic Media Formatted data prior to Substantial Completion of Project. B. Materials and Finishes Data: 1. Preliminary Data: Submit at least 15 days prior to request for final inspection. 2. Final Data: Submit within 10 days after final inspection. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW\DEN003\709275 01 78 23 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.04 DATA FORMAT A. Prepare preliminary data in the form of an instructional manual on electronic media. Prepare final data on electronic media. B. Instructional Manual Format: 1. Cover: Identify manual with title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA” and list: a. Project title. b. Designate applicable system, equipment, material, or finish. c. Identity of separate structure as applicable. d. Identify volume number if more than one volume. e. Identity of equipment number and Specification section. 2. Title Page: a. Contractor name, address, and telephone number. b. Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, or maintenance contractor’s name, address, and telephone number, as appropriate. 1) Identify area of responsibility of each. 2) Provide name and telephone number of local source of supply for parts and replacement. 3. Table of Contents: a. Arranged in systematic order with consecutive page numbers. b. Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 4. Material shall be suitable for reproduction, with quality equal to original. Photocopying/scanning of material will be acceptable, except for material containing photographs. C. Electronic Media Format: 1. Portable Document Format (PDF): a. After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable to Engineer, submit Operation and Maintenance data in PDF format on CD. b. Files to be exact duplicates of Engineer-accepted preliminary data. Arrange by specification number and name. c. Files to be fully functional and viewable in most recent version of Adobe Acrobat. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2021 01 78 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Informational: 1. Data Outline: Submit detailed outline of proposed organization and contents of Final Data prior to preparation of Preliminary Data. 2. Preliminary Data: a. Submit for Engineer’s review. b. If data meets conditions of the Contract: 1) A copy will be forwarded to Resident Project Representative. 2) A copy will be retained in Engineer’s file. c. If data does not meet conditions of the Contract: 1) Submittal will be returned to Contractor with Engineer’s comments (on separate document) for revision. 2) Engineer’s comments will be retained in Engineer’s file. 3) Resubmit manual revised in accordance with Engineer’s comments. 3. Final Data: Submit in format specified herein. 1.06 DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Content For Each Unit (or Common Units) and System: 1. Product Data: a. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to specific product. b. Clearly annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. c. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. d. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. e. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. f. Original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, detailed assembly drawings showing each part with part numbers and sequentially numbered parts list, and diagrams required for maintenance. g. Spare parts ordering instructions. h. Where applicable, identify installed spares and other provisions for future work (e.g., reserved panel space, unused components, wiring, terminals). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW\DEN003\709275 01 78 23 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Drawings: Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Format: 1) Configured to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, or 11 inches by 17 inches. 2) Identify Specification section and product on Drawings and envelopes. b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. c. Control and flow diagrams. d. Coordinate Drawings with Project record documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Instructions and Procedures: Within text, as required to supplement product data. a. Format: 1) Organize in consistent format under separate heading for each different procedure. 2) Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 3) Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, including: a) Proper procedures in event of failure. b) Instances that might affect validity of guarantee or Bond. b. Installation Instructions: Including alignment, adjusting, calibrating, and checking. c. Operating Procedures: 1) Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. 2) Test procedures and results of factory tests where required. 3) Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions. 4) Description of operation sequence (as available from Public Works). 5) Shutdown instructions for both short and extended duration (as available from Public Works). 6) Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable. 7) Safety precautions. 8) Special operating instructions. d. Maintenance and Overhaul Procedures: 1) Routine maintenance. 2) Guide to troubleshooting. 3) Disassembly, removal, repair, reinstallation, and re- assembly. 4. Guarantee, Bond, and Service Agreement: In accordance with Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2021 01 78 23 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Content for Each Electric or Electronic Item or System: 1. Description of Unit and Component Parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Interconnection wiring diagrams, including control and lighting systems. 2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards. 3. Electrical service. 4. Control requirements and interfaces. 5. Communication requirements and interfaces. 6. List of electrical relay settings, and control and alarm contact settings. 7. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram, including as applicable, single-line, three-line, schematic and internal wiring, and external interconnection wiring. 8. As-installed control diagrams (as available from Public Works). 9. Operating Procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Startup and shutdown sequences, normal and emergency. c. Safety precautions. d. Special operating instructions. 10. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine maintenance. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Adjustment and checking. d. List of relay settings, control and alarm contact settings. 11. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. 12. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. C. Maintenance Summary: 1. Compile individual Maintenance Summary for each applicable equipment item, respective unit or system, and for components or sub-units. 2. Format: a. Use Maintenance Summary Form bound with this section or electronic facsimile of such. b. Each Maintenance Summary may take as many pages as required. c. Complete using electronic printing. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW\DEN003\709275 01 78 23 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be greased or oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication. 4. Recommended Spare Parts: a. Data to be consistent with manufacturer’s Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished in O&M manuals. b. “Unit” is the unit of measure for ordering the part. c. “Quantity” is the number of units recommended. d. “Unit Cost” is the current purchase price. 1.07 DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content for Applied Materials and Finishes: 1. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: a. Manufacturer’s recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 1.08 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section”, is part of this Specification. 1. Maintenance Summary Form. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2021 01 78 23 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM PROJECT: CONTRACT NO.: 1. EQUIPMENT ITEM 2. MANUFACTURER 3. EQUIPMENT/TAG NUMBER(S) 4. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS) 5. NAMEPLATE DATA (hp, voltage, speed, etc.) 6. MANUFACTURER’S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE a. Name Telephone No. b. Address 7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Maintenance Operation Comments Frequency Lubricant (If Applicable) List briefly each maintenance operation required and refer to specific information in manufacturer’s standard maintenance manual, if applicable. (Reference to manufacturer’s catalog or sales literature is not acceptable.) List required frequency of each maintenance operation. Refer by symbol to lubricant required. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW\DEN003\709275 01 78 23 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 8. LUBRICANT LIST Reference Symbol Shell Exxon Mobile Chevron Texaco BP Amoco Or Equal List symbols used in No. 7 above. List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by each manufacturer for the specific use recommended. 9. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER’S INVENTORY Part No. Description Unit Quantity Unit Cost Note: Identify parts provided by this Contract with two asterisks. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ANCHORAGE AND BRACING JULY 2021 01 88 15 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 01 88 15 ANCHORAGE AND BRACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section covers requirements for anchorage and bracing of equipment, distribution systems, and other nonstructural components required in accordance with the ICC 2018 International Building Code (IBC), for seismic, wind, gravity, soil, and operational loads. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 3. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Permitting building agency; may be a federal, state, local, or other regional department, or individual including building official, fire chief, fire marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department, or health department, electrical inspector; or others having statutory authority. AHJ may be Owner when authorized to be self-permitting by governmental permitting agency or when no governmental agency has authority. B. Designated Seismic System: Electrical and mechanical system or their components for which component importance factor is greater than 1.0. 1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Anchorage and bracing systems shall be designed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Washington. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ANCHORAGE AND BRACING PW\DEN003\709275 01 88 15 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Design anchorage into concrete including embedment in accordance with ACI 318-14; Chapter 17 (or other industry standard approved by Engineer), and Project Specifications. a. Unless otherwise noted, design for cracked concrete condition. 3. Design anchorage and bracing of mechanical, and electrical components and systems in accordance with this section, unless a design is specifically provided within Contract Documents or where exempted hereinafter. 4. Design attachments, braces, and anchors for equipment, components, and distribution systems to structure for gravity, seismic, wind, and operational loading. 5. Anchor and brace piping, whether exempt or not exempt for this section, so that lateral or vertical displacement does not result in damage or failure to essential mechanical or electrical equipment. 6. Provide supplementary framing where required to transfer anchorage and bracing loads to structure. 7. Adjust equipment pad sizes or provide additional anchorage confinement reinforcing to provide required anchorage capacities. 8. Design anchorage and bracing for: a. Equipment and components that weigh more than 400 pounds and have center of mass located 4 feet or less above adjacent finished floor. b. Equipment weighing more than 20 pounds that has center of mass located more than 4 feet above adjacent finished floor. c. Mechanical and electrical components that are not provided with flexible connections between components and associated ductwork, piping, or conduit. d. Distribution systems that weigh more than 5 pounds per foot that have center of mass located more than 4 feet above adjacent finished floor. 9. For components exempted from design requirements of this section, provide bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened attachments to supporting structure. B. Design Loads: 1. Gravity: Design anchorage and bracing for self-weight and superimposed loads on components and equipment. 2. Wind: Design anchorage and bracing for project specific wind criteria for exterior and wind-exposed mechanical and electrical equipment. Alternately, manufacturer certification may be provided for components such as roofing and flashing to verify attachments meet Project-specific design criteria. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ANCHORAGE AND BRACING JULY 2021 01 88 15 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Operational: a. For loading supplied by equipment manufacturer for IBC required load cases. b. Loads may include equipment vibration, torque, thermal effects, effects of internal contents (weight and sloshing), water hammer, and other load-inducing conditions. c. Locate braces to minimize vibration to or movement of structure. d. For vibrating loads, use anchors meeting requirements of Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, for anchors with designated capacities for vibratory loading per manufacturer’s ICC-ES report. 4. Seismic: a. In accordance with 2018 IBC, Section 1613, and Chapter 13 of ASCE 7. b. Design anchorages for parts or elements of mechanical and electrical systems in accordance with provisions of IBC and following Site-specific seismic criteria, unless noted otherwise on Drawings: 1) Site-Specific Spectral Response Coefficients: a) Short Period Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Acceleration, 5 Percent Damped: SS equals 1.34g. b) Short Period Design Spectral Response Acceleration, 5 Percent Damped: SDS equals 1.074g. 2) Site Class: D. 3) Seismic Design Category (SDC):D, unless noted otherwise. 4) Risk Category: III, unless noted otherwise. c. Design forces for anchors in concrete or masonry shall be in accordance with ASCE 7, Section 13.4.2 as applicable for Project Seismic Design Category. C. Seismic Design Requirements: Other seismic design and detailing information identified in ASCE 7, Chapter 13, is required to be provided for new mechanical and electrical components, systems, or equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. List of mechanical and electrical equipment requiring Contractor- designed anchorage and bracing, unless specifically exempted. b. Manufacturers’ engineered seismic and non-seismic hardware product data. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ANCHORAGE AND BRACING PW\DEN003\709275 01 88 15 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS c. Attachment assemblies’ drawings including seismic attachments; include connection hardware, braces, and anchors or anchor bolts for nonexempt components, equipment, and systems. d. Submittal will be rejected if proposed anchorage method would create excessive stress to supporting member. Revise anchorages and strengthen structural support to eliminate overstressed condition. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and Bracing Calculations: For attachments, braces, and anchorages, include IBC and Project-specific criteria as noted on General Structural Notes on Drawings, in addition to manufacturer’s specific criteria used for design; sealed by a structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. 2. Manufacturer’s hardware installation requirements. C. Deferred Submittals: 1. Submitted seismic anchorage drawings and calculations are identified as IBC deferred submittals and will be submitted to and must be accepted by AHJ prior to installation of component, equipment, or distribution system. 2. Submit deferred Action Submittals such as Shop Drawings with supporting deferred informational submittals such as calculations no less than 4 weeks in advance of installation of component, equipment or distribution system to be anchored to structure. 1.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all other specified, regulatory required, or required repair verification inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Design and construct attachments and supports transferring seismic and non- seismic loads to structure of materials and products suitable for application and in accordance with design criteria shown on Drawings and nationally recognized standards. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ANCHORAGE AND BRACING JULY 2021 01 88 15 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Provide anchor bolts for anchorage of equipment to concrete in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Provide anchor bolts of the size, minimum embedment, and spacing designated in calculations submitted by Contractor and accepted by Engineer. C. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners or sleeve anchors for seismic attachments and anchorage where resistance to tension loads is required. Do not use expansion anchors, other than undercut anchors, for nonvibration isolated mechanical equipment rated over 10 horsepower. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Make attachments, bracing, and anchorage in such a manner that component lateral force is transferred to lateral force resisting system of structure through a complete load path. B. Design, provide, and install overall seismic anchorage system to provide restraint in all directions, including vertical, for each component or system so anchored. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install components or their anchorages or restraints prior to review and acceptance by Engineer and AHJ. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. In accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. B. Provide any other specified, regulatory required, or required repair verification inspection and testing that is not listed in Statement of Special Inspections in accordance with Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND JULY 2021 FACILITY STARTUP ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 01 91 14 - 1 SECTION 01 91 14 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Facility: Entire Project, or an agreed-upon portion, including all of its unit processes. B. Functional Test: Test or tests in presence of Engineer and Owner to demonstrate that installed equipment meets manufacturer’s installation, calibration, and adjustment requirements and other requirements as specified. C. Performance Test: Test or tests performed after any required functional test in presence of Engineer and Owner to demonstrate and confirm individual equipment meets performance requirements specified in individual sections. D. Unit Process: As used in this section, a unit process is a portion of the facility that performs a specific process function, such as sewage conveyance . E. Facility Performance Demonstration: 1. A demonstration, conducted by Contractor, with assistance of Owner, to demonstrate and document the performance of the entire operating facility, both manually and automatically (if required), based on criteria developed in conjunction with Owner and as accepted by Engineer. 2. Such demonstration is for the purposes of (i) verifying to Owner entire facility performs as a whole, and (ii) documenting performance characteristics of completed facility for Owner’s records. Neither the demonstration nor the evaluation is intended in any way to make performance of a unit process or entire facility the responsibility of Contractor, unless such performance is otherwise specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan. 2. Functional and performance test results. 3. Completed Unit Process Startup Form for each unit process. 4. Completed Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND PW\DEN003\709275 FACILITY STARTUP JULY 2021 01 91 14 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.03 FACILITY STARTUP AND PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION PLAN A. Develop a written plan, in conjunction with Owner’s operations personnel; to include the following: 1. Step-by-step instructions for startup of each unit process and the complete facility. 2. Unit Process Startup Form (sample attached), to minimally include the following: a. Description of the unit process, including equipment numbers/nomenclature of each item of equipment and all included devices. b. Detailed procedure for startup of the unit process, including valves to be opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc. c. Startup requirements for each unit process, including water, power, chemicals, etc. d. Space for evaluation comments. 3. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form (sample attached), to minimally include the following: a. Description of unit processes included in the facility startup. b. Sequence of unit process startup to achieve facility startup. c. Description of computerized operations, if any, included in the facility. d. Contractor certification facility is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully automatic operation. e. Signature spaces for Contractor and Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Facility Startup Meetings: Schedule, in coordination with Project Representative, to discuss test schedule, test methods, materials, chemicals and liquids required, facilities operations interface, and Owner involvement. B. Contractor’s Testing and Startup Representative: 1. Designate and furnish one or more personnel to coordinate and expedite testing and facility startup. 2. Representative(s) shall be present during startup meetings and shall be available at all times during testing and startup. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND JULY 2021 FACILITY STARTUP ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 01 91 14 - 3 C. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping, test equipment and other materials and equipment required for testing and startup. D. Provide Subcontractor and equipment manufacturers’ staff adequate to prevent delays. Schedule ongoing work so as not to interfere with or delay testing and startup. E. Owner will: 1. Provide water, power, chemicals, and other items as required for startup, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Operate process units and facility with support of Contractor. 3. Provide labor and materials as required for laboratory analyses. 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING A. Preparation: 1. Complete installation before testing. 2. Furnish qualified manufacturers’ representatives, when required by individual Specification sections. 3. Obtain and submit from equipment manufacturer’s representative Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation Form, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, when required by individual Specification sections. 4. Equipment Test Report Form: Provide written test report for each item of equipment to be tested, to include the minimum information: a. Owner/Project Name. b. Equipment or item tested. c. Date and time of test. d. Type of test performed (Functional or Performance). e. Test method. f. Test conditions. g. Test results. h. Signature spaces for Contractor and Engineer as witness. 5. Cleaning and Checking: Prior to beginning functional testing: a. Calibrate testing equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. b. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, connected piping, and structures to ensure they are free of foreign material. c. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. d. Turn rotating equipment by hand when possible to confirm that equipment is not bound. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND PW\DEN003\709275 FACILITY STARTUP JULY 2021 01 91 14 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS e. Open and close valves by hand and operate other devices to check for binding, interference, or improper functioning. f. Check power supply to electric-powered equipment for correct voltage. g. Adjust clearances and torque. h. Test piping for leaks. 6. Ready-to-test determination will be by Engineer based at least on the following: a. Acceptable Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Notification by Contractor of equipment readiness for testing. c. Receipt of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, if so specified. d. Adequate completion of work adjacent to, or interfacing with, equipment to be tested. e. Availability and acceptability of manufacturer’s representative, when specified, to assist in testing of respective equipment. f. Satisfactory fulfillment of other specified manufacturer’s responsibilities. g. Equipment and electrical tagging complete. h. Delivery of all spare parts and special tools. B. Functional Testing: 1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections. 2. Notify Owner and Engineer in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled date of testing. 3. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results. 4. When, in Engineer’s opinion, equipment meets functional requirements specified, such equipment will be accepted for purposes of advancing to performance testing phase, if so required by individual Specification sections. Such acceptance will be evidenced by Engineer/Owner’s signature as witness on Equipment Test Report. C. Performance Testing: 1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections. 2. Notify Engineer and Owner in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled date of test. 3. Performance testing shall not commence until equipment has been accepted by Engineer as having satisfied functional test requirements specified. 4. Type of fluid, gas, or solid for testing shall be as specified. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish labor, materials, and supplies for conducting the test and taking samples and performance measurements. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND JULY 2021 FACILITY STARTUP ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 01 91 14 - 5 6. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results. 7. When, in Engineer’s opinion, equipment meets performance requirements specified, such equipment will be accepted as to conforming to Contract requirements. Such acceptance will be evidenced by Engineer’s signature on Equipment Test Report. 3.03 STARTUP OF UNIT PROCESSES A. Prior to unit process startup, equipment within unit process shall be accepted by Engineer as having met functional and performance testing requirements specified. B. Startup sequencing of unit processes shall be as chosen by Contractor to meet schedule requirements. C. Make adjustments, repairs, and corrections necessary to complete unit process startup. D. Startup shall be considered complete when, in opinion of Engineer, unit process has operated in manner intended for 5 continuous days without significant interruption. This period is in addition to functional or performance test periods specified elsewhere. E. Significant Interruption: May include any of the following events: 1. Failure of Contractor to provide and maintain qualified onsite startup personnel as scheduled. 2. Failure to meet specified functional operation for more than 2 consecutive hours. 3. Failure of any critical equipment or unit process that is not satisfactorily corrected within 5 hours after failure. 4. Failure of any noncritical equipment or unit process that is not satisfactorily corrected within 24 hours after failure. 5. As determined by Engineer. F. A significant interruption will require startup then in progress to be stopped. After corrections are made, startup test period to start from beginning again. 3.04 FACILITY PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION A. When, in the opinion of Engineer, startup of all unit processes has been achieved, sequence each unit process to the point that facility is operational. B. Demonstrate proper operation of required interfaces within and between individual unit processes. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND PW\DEN003\709275 FACILITY STARTUP JULY 2021 01 91 14 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. After facility is operating, complete performance testing of equipment and systems not previously tested. D. Document, as defined in Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan, the performance of the facility, until all unit processes are operable and under control of computer system. E. Certify, on the Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form, that facility is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully automatic and computerized operation. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. Supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this Specification: 1. Unit Process Startup Form. 2. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND JULY 2021 FACILITY STARTUP ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 01 91 14 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 UNIT PROCESS STARTUP FORM OWNER: PROJECT: Unit Process Description: (Include description and equipment number of all equipment and devices): Startup Procedure (Describe procedure for sequential startup and evaluation, including valves to be opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc.): Startup Requirements (Water, power, chemicals, etc.): Evaluation Comments: CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND JULY 2021 FACILITY STARTUP ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 01 91 14 SUPPLEMENT 2 - 1 FACILITY PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION/CERTIFICATION FORM OWNER: PROJECT: Unit Processes Description (List unit processes involved in facility startup): Unit Processes Startup Sequence (Describe sequence for startup, including computerized operations, if any): Contractor Certification that Facility is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully automatic operation: Contractor: Date: _________________________, 20____ Engineer: (Authorized Signature) Date: _________________________, 20____ CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 DEMOLITION JULY 2021 02 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A10.6, Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations. 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Part 1926—Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 40: Part 61—National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ACM: Asbestos-containing material. B. Demolition: Dismantling, razing, destroying, or wrecking of any fixed building or structure or any part thereof. Demolition also includes removal of pipes, manholes tanks, conduit, and other underground facilities, whether as a separate activity or in conjunction with construction of new facilities. C. Modify: Provide all necessary material and labor to modify an existing item to the condition indicated or specified. D. Relocate: Remove, protect, clean and reinstall equipment, including electrical, instrumentation, and all ancillary components required to make the equipment fully functional, to the new location identified on Drawings. E. Renovation: Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way. F. Salvage/Salvageable: Remove and deliver, to the specified location(s), the equipment, building materials, or other items so identified to be saved from destruction, damage, or waste; such property to remain that of Owner. Unless otherwise specified, title to items identified for demolition shall revert to Contractor. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT DEMOLITION PW\DEN003\709275 02 41 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Submit proposed Demolition/Renovation Plan, in accordance with requirements specified herein, for approval before such Work is started. 2. Submit copies of any notifications, authorizations and permits required to perform the Work. 1.04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. When applicable, demolition Work shall be accomplished in strict accordance with 29 CFR 1926-Subpart T. B. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, Contractor’s safety requirements shall conform to ANSI A10.6. C. Furnish timely notification of this demolition project to applicable federal, state, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61-Subpart M. 1.05 DEMOLITION/RENOVATION PLAN A. Demolition/Renovation Plan shall provide for safe conduct of the Work and shall include: 1. Detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation; 2. The Contractor’s planned sequence of operations, including coordination with other work in progress; 3. Procedures for removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged. 4. Disconnection schedule of utility services. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The Work of this Specification shall not commence until Contractor’s Demolition Plan has been approved by Engineer. B. Include the Work of this Specification in the progress schedule, as specified in Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 DEMOLITION JULY 2021 02 41 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE DEMOLISHED A. Structures: 1. Existing below-grade wet well structure indicated shall be removed as shown on Drawings 2. All interior components shall be removed and piping and appurtenances extending inside the inner diameter concrete surface shall be trimmed flush. B. Utilities and Related Equipment: 1. Notify Engineer and Owner or appropriate utilities to turn off affected services at least 48 hours before starting demolition activities. 2. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by Engineer. 3. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on Drawings, notify Engineer and Owner prior to further work in that area. C. Paving and Slabs: Sawcut and remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated on Drawings. D. Concrete: Where new concrete adjoins existing concrete, thoroughly clean and mechanically roughen existing concrete surfaces to roughness profile of 3/16 inch. Rebar and small embeds at existing concrete may be required to be left to engage new concrete. Saturate surface with water for 24 hours prior to placing new concrete. The new Work shall tie into the existing construction as shown on Drawings. E. Patching: 1. Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished Work, patch and repair to match adjacent finished surfaces as to texture and finish. 2. Where new Work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new Work. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT DEMOLITION PW\DEN003\709275 02 41 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and shall include: a. Fill holes and depressions caused by previous physical damage or left as a result of removals in existing concrete walls with an approved patching material, applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. F. Electrical: 1. Cut off concealed or embedded conduit, boxes, or other materials a minimum of 3/4 inch below final finished surface. 2. When removing designated equipment, conduit and wiring may require rework to maintain service to other equipment. 3. Rework existing circuits, or provide temporary circuits as necessary during renovation to maintain service to existing lighting and equipment not scheduled to be renovated. Existing equipment and circuiting shown are based upon limited field surveys. Verify existing conditions, make all necessary adjustments, and record the Work on the Record Drawings. This shall include, but is not limited to, swapping and other adjustments to branch circuits and relocation of branch circuit breakers within panelboards as required to accomplish the finished work. 4. Reuse of existing devices, conduits, boxes, or equipment will be permitted only where specifically indicated. 5. Raceways and cabling not scheduled for reuse. a. Inaccessibly Concealed: Cut off and abandon in place. b. Exposed or Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Remove. 6. Raceways and Cabling Scheduled for Future Use: Cap/seal and tag. 7. Relocating Equipment: Extend existing wiring or run new wiring from the source. 8. Where the existing raceway is concealed, the outlet box shall be cleaned, and a blank cover plate installed. 9. Where the concealed raceway is uncovered remove raceway (or extended to new location if appropriate). 10. Provide new typewritten panelboard circuit directory cards. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Dust and Debris Control: 1. Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 DEMOLITION JULY 2021 02 41 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Traffic Control Signs: Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal Work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. C. Existing Work: 1. Survey the Site and examine Drawings and Specifications to determine the extent of the Work before beginning any demolition or renovation. 2. Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items scheduled to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of Owner; any Contractor-damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as directed by Engineer. 3. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between removal of existing exterior surfaces and installation of new to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 4. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded as a result of or during performance of the Work. Responsibility for additional structural elements or increasing the strength of existing structural elements as may be required as a result of any Work performed under this Contract shall be that of the Contractor. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have Engineer approval. 5. Do not overload pavements to remain. D. Weather Protection: For portions of the structure scheduled to remain, protect from weather at all times. E. Trees: Protect trees within the Site that might be damaged during demolition and are indicated to be left in place, by a 6-foot high fence. The fence shall be securely erected a minimum of 5 feet from the trunk of individual trees or follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of trees. Any tree designated to remain that is damaged during the Work shall be replaced in kind, as approved by the Engineer. F. Facilities: 1. Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. 2. Protect all facility elements not scheduled for demolition. 3. Provide interior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT DEMOLITION PW\DEN003\709275 02 41 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS G. Protection of Personnel: 1. During demolition, continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the demolition site. 2. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner’s personnel and the general public from injury due to demolition Work. 3. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner’s personnel and the general public to occupied portions of the structure. 3.03 BURNING A. The use of burning at the Site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted. 3.04 BACKFILL A. Do not use demolition debris as backfill material. B. Fill excavations, open basements and other hazardous openings to existing ground level or foundation level of new construction in accordance with Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. 3.05 TITLE TO MATERIALS A. All salvaged equipment will remain the property of Owner. B. With the exception of the following listed salvaged equipment, all items designated to be removed shall become the property of Contractor: 1. Three submersible pumps. 2. Two level instruments. C. Title to equipment and materials resulting from demolition is vested in the Contractor upon approval by Engineer of Contractor’s Demolition Plan, and the resulting authorization by Engineer to begin demolition. 3.06 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL A. Do not remove equipment and materials without approval of Contractor’s Demolition Plan by Engineer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 DEMOLITION JULY 2021 02 41 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Remove salvaged items designated as the property of Owner in a manner to prevent damage, and pack or crate, if requested, to protect the items from damage while in storage or during shipment. Properly identify containers as to contents. C. Repair or replace, at the discretion of Owner, items damaged during removal or storage. D. Deliver salvaged items that are designated as the property of Owner to a storage site as agreed upon at the Preconstruction Conference. 3.07 UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to remain in place, shall be disposed of in an acceptable manner as defined in the approved Demolition Plan. B. Combustible material shall be disposed of off the Site. 3.08 CLEANUP A. Debris and rubbish shall be removed and transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 03 30 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Work shall conform to requirements of ACI 301-10, Specifications for Structural Concrete, unless otherwise specified. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 117, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. 301-10, Specifications for Structural Concrete. c. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. d. 306.1, Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. e. 308.1-11, Specification for Curing Concrete. f. SP-66, Detailing Manual. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. b. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. c. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. d. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. e. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. f. C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. g. C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. h. C231/C231M, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. i. C260/C260M, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. j. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. k. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. l. C595/C595M, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS m. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. n. C989, Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars. o. C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution. p. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout for Masonry. q. C1077, Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation. r. C1218/C1218M, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. s. C1260, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method). t. C1293, Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction. u. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. v. C1567, Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali- Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method). w. C1602/C1602M, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. x. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). y. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber. z. D1751, Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). aa. D1752, Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. bb. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. cc. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Special Inspection, or Testing Materials Used in Construction. 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. Manual of Standard Practice. b. Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 4. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cold Weather: When ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or is approaching 40 degrees F and falling. B. Contractor’s Licensed Design Engineer: Individual representing Contractor who is licensed to practice engineering as defined by statutory requirements of professional licensing laws in state or jurisdiction in which Project is to be constructed. C. Defective Area: Surface defects that include honeycomb, rock pockets, indentations, and surface voids greater than 3/16-inch deep, surface voids greater than 3/4 inch in diameter, cracks in liquid containment structures and below grade habitable spaces that are 0.005-inch wide and wider, and cracks in other structures that are 0.010-inch wide and wider, spalls, chips, embedded debris, sand streaks, mortar leakage from form joints, deviations in formed surface that exceed specified tolerances and include but are not limited to fins, form pop-outs, and other projections. At exposed concrete, defective areas also include texture irregularities, stains, and other color variations that cannot be removed by cleaning. D. Exposed Concrete: Concrete surface that can be seen inside or outside of structure regardless of whether concrete is above water, dry at all times, or can be seen when structure is drained. E. Hot Weather: As defined in ACI 305.1. F. New Concrete: Concrete less than 60 days old. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Formwork and Formwork Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, conform to requirements of ACI 301. b. Reinforcing steel prepared in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and ACI SP-66 Detailing Manual: 1) Bending lists. 2) Placing drawings. 2. Concrete and Grout Mix Designs: a. Contain proportions of materials and admixtures to be used on Project, signed by mix designer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS b. Documentation of average strength for each proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301. Documentation of material testing shall be 1 year old or less. c. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common product Requirements, for the following: 1) Portland cement. 2) Fly ash. 3) Slag cement. 4) Aggregates, including specified class designation for coarse aggregate. 5) Admixtures. 6) Concrete producer has verified compatibility of constituent materials in design mix. d. Test Reports: 1) Cement: Chemical analysis report. 2) Supplementary Cementitious Materials: Chemical analysis report and report of other specified test analyses. 3) Water-Soluble Chloride-Ion Content in Hardened Concrete: Unless otherwise permitted, in accordance with ASTM C1218/C1218M at an age between 28 days and 42 days. e. Aggregates: 1) Coarse Aggregate Gradation: List gradings and percent passing through each sieve. 2) Fine Aggregate Gradation: List gradings and percent passing through each sieve. 3) Percent of fine aggregate weight to total aggregate weight. 4) Deleterious substances in fine aggregate per ASTM C33/C33M, Table 2. 5) Deleterious substances in coarse aggregate per ASTM C33/C33M, Table 4. 6) Test Reports: a) Alkali Aggregate Reactivity: Aggregate shall be classified as nonpotentially reactive in accordance with Article Concrete Mix Design. Include documentation of test results per applicable standards. 7) Admixtures: Manufacturer’s product data sheets for each admixture used in proposed mix designs. 3. Product Data: Specified ancillary materials. 4. Detailed plan for curing and protection of concrete placed and cured in cold weather. Details shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for protecting subgrade from frost and accumulation of ice or snow on reinforcement, other metallic embeds, and forms prior to placement. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS b. Procedures for measuring and recording temperatures of reinforcement and other embedded items prior to concrete placement. c. Methods for temperature protection during placement. d. Types of covering, insulation, housing, or heating to be provided. e. Curing methods to be used during and following protection period. f. Use of strength accelerating admixtures. g. Methods for verification of in-place strength. h. Documentation of embeds that must be at a temperature above freezing prior to placement of concrete. i. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. j. Procedures for preventing drying during dry, windy conditions. 5. Detailed plan for hot weather placements including curing and protection for concrete placed in ambient temperatures over 80 degrees F. Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for measuring, and recording temperatures of reinforcement and other embedded items prior to concrete placement. b. Use of retarding admixture. c. Methods for controlling temperature of reinforcement and other embedded items and concrete materials before and during placement. d. Types of shading and wind protection to be provided. e. Curing methods, including use of evaporation retardant. f. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. g. Procedures for preventing drying during dry, windy conditions. 6. Concrete repair techniques. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer’s application instructions for bond breaker. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance to specified standards: a. Bond breaker. b. Repair materials. 3. Statement of Qualification: a. Batch Plant: Certification as specified herein. b. Mix designer. c. Installer. d. Testing agency. 4. Manufacturer’s written instructions for product shipment, storage, handling, installation/application, and repair for: a. Preformed control joint. 5. Concrete and Grout Delivery Tickets: a. For each batch of concrete before unloading at Site. b. In accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, including requirements 14.2.1 through 14.2.10. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS c. Indicate amount of mixing water withheld and maximum amount that may be permitted to be added at Site. 6. Concrete and grout field sample test results. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Batch Plant: NRMCA Program for Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities or approved equivalent program. 2. Mix Designer: Person responsible for developing concrete mixture proportions certified as NRMCA Concrete Technologist Level 2 or DOT certified mix designer in jurisdiction of the Work. Requirement may be waived if individual is Contractor’s Licensed Design Engineer. 3. Flatwork Finisher: Unless otherwise permitted, at least one person on finishing crew shall be certified as an ACI Flatwork Finisher, or equivalent. 4. Testing Agency: Unless otherwise permitted, an independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. a. Where field testing is required of Contractor, personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. b. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Unload, store, and handle bars in accordance with CRSI publication “Placing Reinforcing Bars.” PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: 1. For exposed areas, use hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof particle board, or steel in “new and undamaged” condition, of sufficient strength and surface smoothness to produce specified finish. 2. For unexposed areas, use new shiplap or plywood. 3. Earth cuts may be used for forming footings. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Exposed slab edges shall be edged to a 1/2-inch radius and construction joints shall be edged to 1/8-inch radius after finishing. Edging shall not form ridges on pavement surface. 2.02 CONCRETE AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. Cement: a. Portland Cement: Unless otherwise specified, conform to requirements of ASTM C150/C150M. b. Blended Hydraulic Cement: 1) Unless otherwise specified, conform to requirements of ASTM C595/C595M. 2) Portland cement used in blended hydraulic cement; conform to requirements of ASTM C150/C150M. c. Furnish from one source. 2. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): a. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F [and Class C] fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618, except as modified herein: 1) ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted otherwise, maximum 3 percent. b. Slag Cement: In accordance with ASTM C989, Grades 100 or 120. 3. Aggregates: Unless otherwise permitted, furnish from one source for each aggregate type used in a mix design. 4. Aggregates: a. In accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, except as modified herein. 1) Class Designation: 4S unless otherwise specified. 2) Free of materials and aggregate types causing popouts, discoloration, staining, or other defects on surface of concrete. 3) Alkali Silica Reactivity: See Article Concrete Mix Design. b. Fine Aggregates: 1) Clean, sharp, natural sand. 2) ASTM C33/C33M. 3) Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, Table 2 and as follows: a) Limit material finer than 75-μm (No. 200) sieve to 3 percent mass of total sample. b) Limit coal and lignite to 0.5 percent. c. Coarse Aggregate: 1) Natural gravels, combination of gravels and crushed gravels, crushed stone, or combination of these materials containing no more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles (long dimension more than five times the short dimension). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2) Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, Table 4 for specified class designation. B. Admixtures: Unless otherwise permitted, furnish from one manufacturer. 1. Characteristics: a. Compatible with other constituents in mix. b. Contain at most, only trace amount chlorides in solution. c. Furnish type of admixture as recommended by manufacturer for anticipated temperature ranges. 2. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. C. Water: Mixing water for concrete and grout shall be potable water, unless alternative sources of water are permitted. 1. Water from alternative sources shall comply with requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M, and concentration of chemicals in combined mixing water shall be less than: a. Chloride Content: 1,000 ppm. b. Sulfate Content as SO4: 3,000 ppm. c. Alkalis as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O): 600 ppm. d. Total Solids by Mass: Less than 50,000 ppm. 2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. General: 1. See Supplement at the end of this section for mix design requirements for each class of concrete used on Project. 2. Prepare design mixtures for concrete by selecting and proportioning ingredients in accordance with requirements of ACI 301, unless otherwise specified. 3. Selection of constituent materials and products in mix design are optional, unless specified otherwise. 4. Unless otherwise specified, desired fresh properties of concrete shall be determined by Contractor, and coordinated with concrete producer. Fresh properties of concrete shall remain stable to satisfaction of Contractor, for duration of placement and consolidation, and shall remain in conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Contractor is encouraged to consider using environmentally sustainable concrete mix design technologies such as use of supplementary cementitious materials, aggregate packing, and self-consolidating concrete. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Potential alkali-aggregate reactivity of concrete: 1. Do not use aggregates known to be susceptible to alkali-carbonate reaction (ACR). 2. Aggregates shall have been tested to determine potential alkali-aggregate reactivity in concrete in accordance with ASTM C1260/C1260M or ASTM C1567. a. Aggregates that indicate expansion greater than 0.10 percent at 16 days after casting shall not be used unless they have been shown to be nondeleteriously reactive in accordance with ASTM C1293, with less than 0.04 percent expansion at 1 year for cement-aggregate combinations or less than 0.04 percent expansion at 2 years for combinations with pozzolan or slag. b. Alkali content of cement used in proposed concrete mixture shall not be greater than alkali content of cement used in test for potential alkali-aggregate reactivity. c. Use low alkali cement and incorporate pozzolans into the concrete mixture as necessary to satisfy testing for potential alkali reactivity. C. Proportions: 1. Design mix to meet aesthetic, durability, and strength requirements. 2. Where fly ash is included in mix, minimum fly ash content shall be a minimum of 15 percent of weight of total cementitious materials. D. Slump: 1. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall select a target slump or slump flow at the point of delivery of concrete mixtures for each application. 2. Selected target slump shall not exceed 9 inches. 3. Concrete shall show no signs of visible segregation. 4. The target slump value shall be enforced for the duration of Project. 5. Determine the slump by ASTM C143/C143M. 6. Slump tolerances shall meet the requirements of ACI 117. 7. Unless otherwise permitted, target slump value is 4 inches at point of delivery, for concrete without high-range, water-reducing admixture. 8. Slump tolerance shall meet requirements of ACI 117. E. Concrete Mixing: 1. General: In accordance with ACI 301, except as modified herein. 2. Truck Mixers: a. For every truck, test slump or slump flow of samples taken per ASTM C94/C94M, paragraph 12.5.1. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 10 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS b. Where specified slump is more than 4 inches, and if slump tests differ by more than 2 inches, discontinue use of truck mixer, unless causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. 2.04 GROUT MIX DESIGN A. Compressive Strength Property: Minimum 2,000 psi at 28 days. Grout strength shall not exceed two times the minimum specified strength. B. Design mix proportions to meet property/strength requirements. C. Grout Mixing: 1. Transit-Mixed Grout: Meet requirements of ASTM C476. 2. Fluid consistency suitable for placing without segregation with a slump of 8 inches to 11 inches. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL A. Deformed Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted. B. Fabrication: Follow CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2.06 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Bond Breaker: 1. Nonstaining type, providing positive bond prevention. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Kansas City, KS; EDOCO Clean Lift Bond Breaker. b. Nox-Crete Products Group, Omaha, NE; Silcoseal Select. B. Tie Wire: 1. Black, soft-annealed 16-gauge wire. 2. Nylon-, epoxy-, or plastic-coated wire. C. Bar Supports and Spacers: 1. Use precast concrete bar supports and side form spacers, unless noted otherwise. Do not use other types of supports or spacers. 2. Bar supports shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to carry loads without failure, displacement, or significant deformation. Space bar CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS supports so minimum concrete cover is maintained for reinforcing between supports. D. Premolded Joint Filler: 1. Bituminous Type: ASTM D994 or ASTM D1751. 2. Sponge Rubber: a. Neoprene, closed-cell, expanded; ASTM D1056, Type 2C5, with compression deflection, 25 percent deflection (limits), 119 kPa to 168 kPa (17 psi to 24 psi) minimum. b. Manufacturer and Product: Monmouth Rubber and Plastics Corporation, Long Branch, NJ; Durafoam DK515IHD. E. Curing Compound: 1. Water-based, high-solids content, nonyellowing, curing compound meeting requirements of ASTM C1315 Type I, Class A. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Super Diamond Clear VOX. b. WR Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, IL; VOCOMP-30. c. Vexcon Chemical, Inc.; Philadelphia, PA; Starseal 1315. d. Dayton Superior; Safe Cure and Seal 1315 EF. F. Evaporation Retardant: 1. Optional: Fluorescent fugitive dye color tint that disappears completely upon drying. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN; MasterKure ER 50. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucobar. G. Repair Material: 1. Contain only trace amounts of chlorides and other chemicals that can potentially cause steel to oxidize. 2. Where repairs of exposed concrete are required, prepare mockup using proposed repair materials and methods, for confirmation of appearance compatibility prior to use. 3. Obtain Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance that products selected are appropriate for specific applications. 4. Repair mortar shall be Site mixed. 5. Prepare concrete substrate and mix, place, and cure repair material in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 12 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems Inc., Shakopee, MN; MasterEmacoS-Series products. b. Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaTop-Series. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Source Quality Control Inspection: Engineer shall have access to and have right to inspect batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors, providing products included in this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. Form Construction: 1. Construct forms and provide smooth-form finish. 2. Radius concrete edges, unless otherwise shown. 3. Make joints tight to prevent escape of mortar and to avoid formation of fins. 4. Brace as required to prevent distortion during concrete placement. 5. On exposed surfaces, locate form ties in uniform pattern or as shown. 6. Construct so ties remain embedded in the member with no metal within 1 inch of concrete surface when forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed. B. Form Removal: 1. Nonsupporting forms (walls and similar parts of Work) may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours from time of concrete placement if: a. Concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to sustain damage by form removal operations. b. Curing and protection operations are maintained. 2. Remove forms with care to prevent scarring and damaging the surface. 3. Prior to form removal, provide thermal protection for concrete being placed under the requirements of cold weather concreting. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. Unless otherwise specified, place reinforcing steel in accordance with CRSI Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Splices and Laps: 1. Lap splice reinforcing: Refer to Structural General Notes in Drawings for additional information. 2. Tie splices with 18-gauge annealed wire as specified in CRSI Standard. 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT INTO FORMWORK A. Placement into Formwork: 1. Reinforcement: Secure in position before placing concrete. 2. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep, except for slabs that shall be placed full depth. Place and consolidate successive layers prior to initial set of first layer to prevent cold joints. 3. Use placement devices, for example, chutes, pouring spouts, and pumps as required to prevent segregation. 4. Vertical Free Fall Drop to Final Placement: a. Forms 8 Inches or Less Wide: 5 feet. b. Forms Wider than 8 Inches: 8 feet, except as specified. 5. Provide sufficient illumination in the interior of forms so concrete deposition is visible, permitting confirmation of consolidation quality. B. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: 1. Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge throughout conveying, hoisting, and placing system for concrete to pass without becoming segregated. 2. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. 3. Wipe clean with device that does not allow mortar to adhere to belt. 4. Cover conveyor belts and chutes. C. Retempering: Not permitted for concrete where cement has partially hydrated. D. Pumping of Concrete: 1. Provide standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or other system onsite during pumping, for adequate redundancy to ensure completion of concrete placement without cold joints in case of primary placing equipment breakdown. 2. Minimum Pump Hose (Conduit) Diameter: 4 inches. 3. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 14 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.04 GROUT PLACEMENT A. Do not mix, covey, or place with equipment constructed of aluminum. B. Fill annular void between existing concrete wet well and FRP wet well insert. Place uniformly around wet well to prevent differential loading of FRP during grout placement. C. Grout lifts shall not exceed 10 feet. Allow each lift to set prior to placing next lift. 3.05 CONSOLIDATION AND VISUAL OBSERVATION A. Provide at least one standby vibrator in operable condition at placement Site prior to placing concrete. 3.06 COLD WEATHER PLACEMENT A. Unless otherwise permitted, shall be in accordance with requirements of ACI 301, ACI 306.1 and as follows: 1. Cold weather requirements shall apply when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or approaching 40 degrees F and falling. 2. Do not place concrete over frozen earth or against surfaces with frost or ice present. Frozen earth shall be thawed to acceptance of Engineer. 3. Unless otherwise permitted, do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 degrees F; requirement is applicable to all surfaces including reinforcement and other embedded items. 4. Provide supplemental external heat as needed when other means of thermal protection are unable to maintain minimum surface temperature of concrete as specified in ACI 306.1. 5. Maintain minimum surface temperature of concrete as specified in ACI 306.1 for no less than 3 days during cold weather conditions. 6. Protect concrete from freezing until end of curing period and until concrete has attained a compressive strength of 3,500 psi or design compressive strength if less than 3,500 psi. B. Provide maximum and minimum temperature sensors placed on concrete surfaces spaced throughout Work to allow monitoring of concrete surface temperatures representative of Work. Unless otherwise permitted, record surface temperature of concrete at least once every 12 hours during specified curing period. C. External Heating Units: Do not exhaust heater flue gases directly into enclosed area as it causes concrete carbonation as a result of concentrated carbon dioxide. D. Cure as specified. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 15 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.07 HOT WEATHER PLACEMENT A. Prepare ingredients, mix, place, cure, and protect in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 305.1, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 95 degrees F at time of placement, or furnish test data or other proof that admixtures and mix ingredients do not produce flash set plastic shrinkage, or cracking as a result of heat of hydration. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain fresh concrete temperatures as specified or less. 2. Internal concrete temperature in structure shall not exceed 158 degrees F, and maximum temperature differential between center of section and external surfaces of concrete shall not exceed 35 degrees F. 3. Provide for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ice, wet cover, or other means as necessary to maintain concrete at or below specified temperature. 4. Cure as specified. 3.08 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER INSTALLATION A. Sufficient in width to completely fill joint space where shown. B. Drive nails approximately 1 foot 6 inches on center through filler, prior to installing, to provide anchorage embedment into concrete during concrete placement. C. Secure premolded joint filler in forms before concrete is placed. 3.09 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: 1. Use manual screeds, vibrating screeds, or roller compacting screeds to place concrete level and smooth. 2. Do not use “jitterbugs” or other special tools designed for purpose of forcing coarse aggregate away from surface and allowing layer of mortar, which will be weak and cause surface cracks or delamination, to accumulate. 3. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials nor add water to surfaces. 4. Cure concrete as specified. B. Slab Tolerances: 1. Exposed Slab Surfaces: Comprise of flat planes as required within tolerances specified. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 16 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: Crowns on floor surface not too high as to prevent 10-foot straightedge from resting on end blocks, nor low spots that allow block of twice the tolerance in thickness to pass under supported 10-foot straightedge. 3. Steel gauge block 5/16-inch thick. 4. Finish Slab Elevation: Slope slabs to floor drain and gutter, and shall adequately drain regardless of tolerances. 5. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness shown. Where thickness tolerance will not affect slope, drainage, or slab elevation, thickness tolerance may exceed 1/2 inch plus. C. Exterior Slab Finish: 1. Provide broom finish unless specified otherwise. 2. Finish exposed edges with steel edging tool. 3. Mark sidewalks transversely at 5-foot intervals with jointing tool. 3.10 EXPOSED METAL OBJECTS A. Remove metal objects not intended to be exposed in as-built condition of structure including wire, nails, and bolts, by chipping back concrete to depth of 1 inch and then cutting or removing metal object. B. Repair area of chipped-out concrete as specified for defective areas. 3.11 PROTECTION AND CURING A. Protect and cure concrete in accordance with requirements of ACI 301, ACI 308.1, and as follows: 1. Protect fresh concrete from direct rays of sunlight, drying winds, and wash by rain. 2. Keep concrete slabs continuously wet for a 7-day period. Intermittent wetting is not acceptable. 3. Cure formed surfaces with curing compound applied in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions as soon as forms are removed and finishing is completed. 4. Remove and replace concrete damaged by freezing. 5. Repair areas damaged by construction, using specified repair materials and approved repair methods. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 - 17 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.12 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. 2. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test specimens onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. 3. Unless otherwise specified, sample concrete for testing for making test specimens, from point of delivery. 4. When concrete is pumped, sample and test air content at point of delivery and at point of placement. 5. Evaluation will be in accordance with ACI 301 and Specifications. 6. Test specimens shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 7. Frequency of testing may be changed at discretion of Engineer. 8. Pumped Concrete: Take concrete samples for slump, ASTM C143/C143M, and test specimens, ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 9. If measured air content at delivery is greater than specified limit, check test of air content will be performed immediately on a new sample from delivery unit. If check test fails, concrete has failed to meet requirements of Contract Documents. If measured air content is less than lower specified limit, adjustments will be permitted in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, unless otherwise specified. If check test of adjusted mixture fails, concrete has failed to meet requirements of Contract Documents. Concrete that has failed to meet requirements of Contract Documents shall be rejected. B. Concrete Strength Test: 1. Unless otherwise specified, one specimen at age of 7 days for information, and two 6-inch diameter or when permitted three 4-inch diameter test specimens at age of 28 days for acceptance. 2. If result of 7-day concrete strength test is less than 50 percent of specified 28-day strength, extend period of moist curing by 7 additional days. 3. Provide a minimum of one spare test specimen per sample. Test spare cylinder as directed by Engineer. C. Grout Strength Test: Collect, store, and test grout specimen per ASTM C1019. D. Cold Weather Placement Tests: 1. During cold weather concreting, cast cylinders for field curing as follows. Use method that will produce greater number of specimens: a. Six extra test cylinders from last 100 cubic yards of concrete. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 - 18 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS b. Minimum three specimens for each 2 hours of placing time or for each 100 cubic yards. 2. These specimens shall be in addition to those cast for lab testing. 3. Protect test cylinders from weather until they can be placed under same protection provided for concrete of structure that they represent. 4. Keep field test cylinders in same protective environment as parts of structure they represent to determine if specified strength has been obtained. 5. Test cylinders in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 6. Use test results to determine specified strength gain prior to falsework removal. 3.13 SUPPLEMENTS A. Requirements of concrete mix designs following “End of Section,” are a part of this Specification and supplement requirements of Part 1 through Part 3 of this section: 1. Concrete Mix Design, Class 4500F2S1P1C1. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE JULY 2021 03 30 10 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS CONCRETE MIX DESIGN, CLASS 4500F2S1P1C1 A. Mix Locations: Typical unless stated otherwise. B. Exposure Categories and Classifications: F2S1P1C1. C. Mix Properties: 1. Limit water to cementitious materials ratio (W/Cm) in mix design to maximum value of 0.45. 2. Minimum concrete compressive strength (f’c) shall be 4,500 psi at 28 days. a. Air-entraining admixtures are prohibited in concrete mixtures and total air content shall not be greater than 3 percent, for the following: 1) Slabs to receive a hard-troweled finish. b. Unless otherwise specified, provide air content based on nominal maximum size of aggregate as follows: Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size in. ‡ Air Content (%)* 3/8 7.5 1/2 7.0 3/4 6.0 1 6.0 1-1/2 5.5 2§ 5.0 3§ 4.5 ‡See ASTM C33/C33M for tolerance on oversize for various nominal maximum size designations. *Tolerance of air content is +1-1/2 percent. §Air contents apply to total mixture. When testing concretes, however, aggregate particles larger than 1-1/2 inches are to be removed by sieving and air content will be measured on sieved fraction (tolerance on air content as delivered applies to this value). Air content of total mixture is computed from value measured on sieved fraction passing 1-1/2-inch sieve in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PW\DEN003\709275 03 30 10 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Provide cementitious materials in accordance with one of the following: a. ASTM C150/C150M Type II; inclusion of supplementary cementitious materials in design mix is optional. b. ASTM C150/C150M types other than Type II, plus supplementary cementitious materials in accordance with one of the following: 1) Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Total Cementitious Materials: Maximum 8 percent by weight. 2) Provide documentation of test results in accordance with ASTM C1012/C1012M, for combinations of cementitious materials providing sulfate resistance with expansion less than 0.10 percent at 6 months. 3) ASTM C595/C595M Type IP or Type IS (less than 70), tested to comply with moderate sulfate resistance option (MS). 4. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent, unless otherwise specified. a. Limits are stated in terms of chloride ions in percent by weight of cement. b. Unless otherwise permitted, provide documentation from concrete tested in accordance with ASTM C1218/C1218M at an age between 28 days and 42 days. D. Refer to PART 1 through PART 3 of this section for additional requirements. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2021 05 50 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Types. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. c. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. d. A489, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. e. A793, Standard Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel. f. A967, Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts. g. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. h. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. i. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 4. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA): a. Specifications for Stainless Steel. b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel. c. Stainless Steel Fabrication. d. Stainless Steel Fasteners. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage, transfer, or use of chemicals. Corrosive area includes areas exposed to corrosive atmosphere such as hydrogen sulfide from wastewater. B. Exterior Area: Location not protected from weather by building or other enclosed structure. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT METAL FABRICATIONS PW\DEN003\709275 05 50 00 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure. D. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure. E. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water-holding structure, such as basin or channel, or wall, ceiling or floor surface inside a covered water-holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water- holding structure, open or covered. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Metal fabrications, including fastener information. B. Informational Submittals: Passivation method for stainless steel members. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble specified items. Package assemblies, which have to be shipped unassembled to protect materials from damage and tag to facilitate identification and field assembly. B. Package stainless steel items to provide protection from carbon impregnation. C. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground. 1.05 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of sidewalk doors found defective during a period of 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in General Conditions. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2021 05 50 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements: Item ASTM Reference Stainless Steel: Bars and Angles A276, AISI Type 316 (316L for welded connections) Shapes A276, AISI Type 304 (304L for welded connections) Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A240/A240M, AISI Type 316 (316L for welded connections) Bolts, Threaded Rods, Anchor Bolts, and Anchor Studs F593, AISI Type 316, Group 2, Condition SH Nuts F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW B. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2.02 FLOOR PLATE A. Material: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A793, AISI Type 304. B. Minimum Thickness: 1. Steel: 1/4 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Surface: Raised-lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. IKG/Borden, Clark, NJ; MEBAC 2. 2. W.S. Molnar Co., Detroit, MI; SLIPNOT Grade 2–Medium. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT METAL FABRICATIONS PW\DEN003\709275 05 50 00 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2.03 SIDEWALK DOORS A. Load Capacity: Provide H-20 wheel loading capacity. B. Component Fabrication: 1. Access Door Leaf(s): 1/4-inch aluminum diamond pattern plate. Provide stainless steel safety chain and attachments for end of double-leaf door assembly when open. 2. Channel Frame: 1/4-inch thick extruded aluminum trough frame with continuous anchor flange around perimeter. Weld 1-1/2-inch diameter drain coupling, and drain pipe, to frame trough at front right corner, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. Door Hardware: 1. Hinges: Heavy-duty brass or stainless steel with stainless steel pins through-bolted to cover plate with tamper-proof stainless steel bolts flush with top of cover and to outside leg of channel frame with stainless steel bolts and locknuts. 2. Lifting Mechanism: Stainless steel compression lift springs enclosed in telescoping vertical housing or stainless steel torsion lift springs. 3. Hold-Open Arm: a. Locks automatically in open position. b. Disengages with slight pull on vinyl grip with one hand. c. Door can be easily closed with one hand by pulling forward and down on vinyl grip. 4. Snap Lock: a. Stainless steel snap lock mounted on bottom of door leaf with removable topside key wrench and inside fixed lever handle. b. Threaded plug for flush outside surface with key wrench removed. D. Aluminum: Mill finished with protective coating applied to surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Coat with 10 MDFT min, bituminous paint or in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Bilco Co., New Haven, CT; J Series. 2. Nystrom Products Co., Minneapolis, MN; FG Series. 3. U.S.F. Fabrication, Hialeah, FL; T Series. 4. ITT Flygt Corporation, Trumbull, CT; FDRN Series. 5. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL; TE Series. 6. Halliday Products, Orlando, FL; WS Series. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2021 05 50 00 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Antiseizing Lubricant for Stainless Steel Threaded Connections: 1. Suitable for potable water supply. 2. Resists washout. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bostik, Middleton, MA; Neverseez. b. Saf-T-Eze Div., STL Corp., Lombard, IL; Anti-Seize. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, sharp, and to well-defined lines. 2. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled in neat, substantial manner. 3. Conceal fastenings where practical; where exposed, flush countersink. 4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 5. Grind cut edges smooth and straight. Round sharp edges to small uniform radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth. 6. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site. B. Materials: Use steel shapes, unless otherwise noted. C. Electrolytic Protection: Coat surfaces of aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, or dissimilar metals, as specified in by manufacturer. D. Fitting: Where movement of fabrications is required or shown, cut, fit, and align items for smooth operation. Make corners square and opposite sides parallel. E. Accessories: Furnish as required for a complete installation. Fasten with stainless steel bolts or screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: 1. Install metal fabrications plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT METAL FABRICATIONS PW\DEN003\709275 05 50 00 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. 3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Obtain Engineer approval prior to field cutting steel members or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE LIFTING ANCHOR A. Locate and hold lifting anchor in place with templates at time concrete is placed. 3.03 ACCESS COVERS A. Install access covers, including sidewalk doors, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Accurately position prior to placing concrete, such that covers are flush with floor surface. C. Protect from damage resulting from concrete placement. Thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of concrete spillage to obtain a clean, uniform appearance. D. Route drain pipe to bottom of slab or as shown on Drawings. 3.04 ELECTROLYTIC PROTECTION A. Aluminum: 1. Coat surfaces of aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, or dissimilar metals, as specified by manufacturer. 2. Allow coating to dry before installation of the material. 3. Protect coated surfaces during installation. 4. Should coating become marred, prepare and touch up in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Stainless Steel: 1. During handling and installation, take necessary precautions to prevent carbon impregnation of stainless steel members. 2. After installation, visually inspect stainless steel surfaces for evidence of iron rust, oil, paint, and other forms of contamination. 3. Remove contamination using cleaning and passivation methods in accordance with requirements of ASTM A380 and ASTM A967. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2021 05 50 00 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. Brushes used to remove foreign substances shall utilize only stainless steel or nonmetallic bristles. 5. After treatment, visually inspect surfaces for compliance. 3.05 FASTENER SCHEDULE A. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide fasteners as follows: Service Use and Location Product Remarks 1. Connections for Steel Fabrications Exterior and Interior Wet and Dry Areas Stainless steel bolted connections 2. All Others Exterior and Interior Wet and Dry Areas Stainless steel fasteners B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on stainless steel threads. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 26 05 01 ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. W-C-596, Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for. b. W-S-896, Switch, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 4. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 5. National Electrical Contractor’s Association, Inc. (NECA): 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). c. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements. d. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. e. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. f. TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. g. WC 55, Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire. h. WC 70, Standard for Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS i. WC 74, 5-46 KV Shielded Power Cable for use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy. j. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. UL: a. 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit—Steel. b. 13, Power-Limited Circuit Cables. c. 44, Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables. d. 486A, Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. e. 508, Industrial Control Equipment. f. 510, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 514B, Fittings for Cable and Conduit. h. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit. i. 1059, Terminal Blocks. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. MCOV: Maximum Allowable Continuous Operating Voltage. C. MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor. D. SASD: Silicon Avalanche Suppressor Diode. E. SVR: Surge Voltage Rating. F. TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Junction and pullboxes. 2. Control devices, terminal blocks, and relays. 3. Support and framing channels. 4. Nameplates and nameplate schedule. 5. Conduit, fittings, and accessories. 6. Conductors, cable, and accessories. 7. Local Control Panels: Arrangement drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams, bill of materials, nameplate schedule, manufacturer information on components. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 8. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Field test reports. 3. Signed permits indicating Work is acceptable to regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 APPROVAL BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC. B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL, shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Products shall comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA 70. B. Like Items of Equipment: End products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’s service. C. Equipment and Devices Installed Outdoors or in Unheated Enclosures: Capable of continuous operation within ambient temperature range of 0 degrees F to 104 degrees F. D. Hazardous Areas: Products shall be acceptable to the regulatory authority having jurisdiction for the class, division, and group of hazardous area indicated. E. Equipment Finish: 1. Manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with light gray color finish as approved by Owner. 2.02 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations: 1. NEMA 250, Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group involved. 2. Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-galvanize finished, or copper-free aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances. 3. Cover: Nonhinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB. b. Appleton; Type EJB. 2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Type: UL 1059. Compression screw clamp, with current bar providing direct contact with wire and yoke, with individual rail mounted terminals. Marking system shall permit use of preprinted or field-marked tags. B. Yokes and Clamping Screws: Zinc-plated, hardened steel. C. Rating: 600V ac. D. Manufacturers: 1. Weidmuller, Inc. 2. Ideal. 2.04 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS A. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel, 12 gauge. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2. Unistrut Corp. 2.05 NAMEPLATES A. Material: Laminated plastic. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Attachment: Adhesive. C. Color: Black, engraved to a white core, or as shown. D. Engraving: 1. Devices and Equipment: Name or tag shown. E. Letter Height: 1. Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, and Other Devices: 1/8 inch. 2. Equipment and Panelboards: 1/4 inch. 2.06 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6. 2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated protective layer. B. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed, or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. C. Fittings: 1. Provide bushings, grounding bushings, conduit hubs, conduit bodies, couplings, unions, conduit sealing fittings, drain seals, drain/breather fittings, expansion fittings, and cable sealing fittings, as applicable. 2. Rigid Galvanized Steel: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. 3. PVC Conduit: a. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3. b. Type: PVC, slip-on. 2.07 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: 1. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 71, WC 72, and WC 74. 2. Conductor Type: Stranded copper. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3. Insulation: Type XHHW-2. B. 600-Volt Rated Cable: 1. General: a. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer’s name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. b. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. c. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. d. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil- resistant. 2. Type 3 (TSP), No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. a. Outer Jacket: 45 mils nominal thickness. b. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35 mils, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. c. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal outside diameter. d. Conductors: 1) Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. 2) 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. 3) Insulation: 15 mils nominal PVC. 4) Jacket: 4 mils nominal nylon. 5) Color Code: Pair conductors black and red. e. Manufacturers: Okonite Co. 3. Type 7, Multiconductor Metal-Clad (UL Type MC) Power Cable: a. Meeting requirements of UL 44 and UL 1569. b. Conductors: 1) Class B stranded, coated copper. 2) Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW or EPR. 3) Grounding Conductors: Bare, stranded copper. c. Sheath: 1) UL listed Type MC. 2) Continuous welded, corrugated aluminum sheath. 3) Suitable for use as grounding conductor. d. Outer Jacket: PVC per UL 1569. e. Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Accessories: 1. Tape: a. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7 mils, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 2. Connectors and Terminations: a. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors: 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. b) Burndy; Insulug. c) ILSCO. 3. Cable Lugs: a. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. b. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. c. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: 1) Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. 2) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. b) Burndy; Hydent. c) ILSCO. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Work shall comply with all applicable provisions of NECA 1. C. Install materials and equipment in hazardous areas in a manner acceptable to regulatory authority having jurisdiction for the class, division, and group of hazardous areas shown. D. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. General Demolition: 1. Where shown, de-energize and disconnect nonelectrical equipment for removal by others. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Where shown, de-energize, disconnect, and remove electrical equipment. 3. Remove affected circuits and raceways back to serving panelboard or control panel. Where affected circuits are consolidated with others, remove raceways back to first shared condulet or box. Where underground or embedded raceways are to be abandoned, remove raceway to 1 inch below surface of structure or 12 inches below grade and restore existing surface. 3.03 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on insulation. B. Cap conduit runs during construction with manufactured seals. C. Close openings in boxes or equipment during construction. 3.04 JUNCTION BOXES A. Installed boxes shall be accessible. B. Install plumb and level. C. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. D. At or Belowgrade: 1. Install boxes for belowgrade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 2. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights. E. Mounting Hardware: Stainless steel. F. Location/Type: 1. Indoor and Outdoor, Hazardous: NEMA 250 Type 7. 3.05 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Install for termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment and local control panels. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.06 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment and raceway systems. B. Channel Type: Type 316 stainless steel. 3.07 NAMEPLATES A. Provide identifying nameplate on all equipment. 3.08 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted. 2. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture. 3. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors. 4. Group raceways installed in same area. 5. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways. 6. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes. 7. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations. 8. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, PVC-coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound. 9. Metal conduit to be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables. 10. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams. 11. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed. B. Conduit Application: 1. Diameter: a. Exterior Minimum: 3/4 inch. 2. Outdoor, Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel. 3. Direct Earth Burial: PVC Schedule 40. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 10 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Connections: 1. Transition From Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. D. Bends: 1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. 2. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches minimum. 3. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. 4. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending. 5. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel. 6. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run and raceways are same size. 7. PVC Conduit: a. Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows. b. 90-Degree Bends: Provide rigid steel elbows, PVC coated where direct buried. c. Use manufacturer’s recommended method for forming smaller bends. E. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: Provide on all raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs. F. PVC Conduit: 1. Solvent Welding: a. Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all joints. b. Install such that joint is watertight. 2. Adapters: a. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type. b. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit: PVC female adapter. 3. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to joining. G. Termination at Enclosures: 1. Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer’s premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 11 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS H. Underground Raceways: 1. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour. 2. Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit, unless otherwise shown. 3. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. 4. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line. 5. Union type fittings not permitted. 6. Spacers: a. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers, designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench. b. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet. 7. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling. 8. Installation with Other Piping Systems: a. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation. b. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation. c. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted. 9. Metallic Raceway Coating: Along entire length, coat with raceway coating. 10. Backfill: As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill. 3.09 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conductor storage, handling, and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. C. Conduit system shall be complete prior to drawing conductors. Lubricate prior to pulling into conduit. Lubrication type shall be as approved by conductor manufacturer. D. Terminate all conductors and cables, unless otherwise shown. E. Do not splice conductors, unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 12 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS F. Wiring within Equipment and Local Control Panels: Remove surplus wire, dress, bundle, and secure. G. Power Conductor Color Coding: 1. No. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering an area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide. 2. No. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. 3. Colors: a. Neutral Wire: White. b. Live Wires, 120/240-Volt, Single-Phase System: Black, red. c. Live Wires, 277/480-Volt, Three-Phase System: Brown, orange, or yellow. d. Ground Wire: Green. H. Connections and Terminations: 1. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control circuit conductors. 2. Tape insulate all uninsulated connections. 3. Install crimp connectors and compression lugs with tools approved by connector manufacturer. 3.10 GROUNDING A. Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and as shown. B. Shielded Instrumentation Cables: 1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal. 2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and apply heat shrink tube. 3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point. C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide in all conduits containing power conductors and control circuits above 50 volts. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 ELECTRICAL JULY 2021 26 05 01 - 13 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. General: 1. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than, requirements established by NETA ATS. 2. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. 3. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been installed. 4. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible. 5. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment are to be: a. Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization. b. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment. C. Tests and inspection shall establish that: 1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances. 2. Installation operates properly. 3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70. D. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement. F. Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer. G. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents. H. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness. I. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored. J. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench to manufacturer’s recommendations, or as otherwise specified. K. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer. L. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT ELECTRICAL PW\DEN003\709275 26 05 01 - 14 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS M. Investigate and repair or replace: 1. Electrical items that fail tests. 2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Damaged electrical equipment. N. Electrical Enclosures: 1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 4. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer, door and panel sections having damaged surfaces. 5. Replace missing or damaged hardware. O. Provide certified test report(s) documenting the successful completion of specified testing. Include field test measurement data. P. Test the following equipment and materials: 1. Conductors: Insulation resistance, No. 4 and larger only. 2. Motors. Q. Controls: 1. Test control and signal wiring for proper termination and function. 2. Test local control panels and other control devices for proper terminations, configuration and settings, and functions. 3. Demonstrate control, monitoring, and indication functions in presence of Owner and Engineer. R. Equipment Line Current: Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EXCAVATION JULY 2021 31 23 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Common Excavation: Removal of material not classified as rock excavation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Excavation Plan, Detailing: a. Methods and sequencing of excavation. b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. c. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation. 1.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws. B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Demolition: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, prior to excavating. B. Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping: This excavation work involves primarily sidewalk removal and soil excavation down to elevation of concrete wet well removal. Salvage plantings in the vicinity that are obstructive and preserve for replanting at the end of work. C. Dewatering: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering, prior to initiating excavation. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT EXCAVATION PW\DEN003\709275 31 23 16 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS D. Excavation Support: Install and maintain as necessary to support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and/or as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot, except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth. B. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer. C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Protection of Work and Property. 3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered. 3.03 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES A. Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with lines, grades, and cross- sections shown, with proper allowance for topsoil or slope protection, where shown. B. Remove stones and rock that exceed 3-inch diameter and that are loose and may roll down slope. Remove exposed roots from cut slopes. C. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6-foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights-of-way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 3.04 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 EXCAVATION JULY 2021 31 23 16 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position. C. Confine stockpiles to within easements, rights-of-way, and approved work areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets. D. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads. E. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity needed for fill or backfill, offsite. B. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of underground facilities as specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for demolition debris. C. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of organic matter, trash, refuse, and junk offsite. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 DEWATERING JULY 2021 31 23 19.01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 31 23 19.01 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Water control plan. 2. Water Level Elevations Observed: Submit same day measured. 1.02 WATER CONTROL PLAN A. As a minimum, include: 1. Descriptions of proposed groundwater and surface water control facilities including, but not limited to, equipment; methods; standby equipment and power supply, pollution control facilities, discharge locations to be utilized, and provisions for immediate temporary water supply as required by this section. 2. Drawings showing locations, dimensions, and relationships of elements of each system. 3. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed dewatering systems and components. B. If system is modified during installation or operation revise or amend and resubmit Water Control Plan. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Continuously control water during course of construction, including weekends and holidays and during periods of work stoppages, and provide adequate backup systems to maintain control of water. 3.02 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. See Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Temporary Controls. B. Remove surface runoff controls when no longer needed. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT DEWATERING PW\DEN003\709275 31 23 19.01 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.03 DEWATERING SYSTEMS A. Provide, operate, and maintain dewatering systems of sufficient size and capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in dry and to lower and maintain groundwater level a minimum of 1 foot below the lowest point of excavation. Continuously maintain excavations free of water, regardless of source, and until backfilled to final grade. B. Design and Operate Dewatering Systems: 1. To prevent loss of ground as water is removed. 2. To avoid inducing settlement or damage to existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. C. Provide sufficient redundancy in each system to keep excavation free of water in event of component failure. 3.04 SETTLEMENT A. Monitoring Dewatering-Induced Settlement: Establish monuments for monitoring settlement at locations selected by Engineer. Monitor vertical movement of each settlement monument, relative to remote benchmark selected by Engineer, at frequency stated in Contractor’s Dewatering Plan. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF WATER A. Obtain permission for water disposal from Port Townsend Public Works Department. B. Treat water collected by dewatering operations, as required, prior to discharge. C. Discharge water in manner that will not cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. D. Remove solids from treatment facilities, if necessary, and perform other maintenance of treatment facilities as necessary to maintain their efficiency. 3.06 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Make assessment of potential for dewatering induced settlement. Provide and operate devices or systems necessary to prevent damage to existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 DEWATERING JULY 2021 31 23 19.01 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Securely support existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property vulnerable to settlement due to dewatering operations. Support shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, underpinning, or compaction grouting. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 FILL AND BACKFILL JULY 2021 31 23 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS SECTION 31 23 23 FILL AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than 75-Micrometers (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. b. C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. c. D75, Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. d. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). e. D1556, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. f. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). g. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. h. D4254, Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. i. D4832, Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders. j. D6938, Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Relative Compaction: 1. Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698 as determined by Engineer. 2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT FILL AND BACKFILL PW\DEN003\709275 31 23 23 - 2 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Optimum Moisture Content: 1. Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine maximum dry density for relative compaction. 2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch sieve. C. Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on maximum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and minimum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4254. D. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation. E. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work. F. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. G. Geosynthetics: Geotextiles, geogrids, or geomembranes. H. Well-Graded: 1. A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes. 2. Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. 3. Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. I. Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at 60-degree angle from horizontal measured from: 1. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs. 2. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder. 3. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts. J. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or near Site. K. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 FILL AND BACKFILL JULY 2021 31 23 23 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS L. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for specified use. M. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities. N. Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under structures. O. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the latest edition of the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Certified test results from independent testing agency. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify Engineer when: 1. Structure is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling operations are resumed after a period of inactivity. 2. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed. 3. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition; and Section 31 23 16, Excavation, prior to placing fill or backfill. B. Backfill around water-holding structures only after completion of satisfactory leakage tests as specified in Section 03 30 10, Structural Concrete, and/or Engineer provides authorization to backfill. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Gradation Tests: 1. As necessary to locate acceptable sources of imported material. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT FILL AND BACKFILL PW\DEN003\709275 31 23 23 - 4 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. During production of imported material, test as follows: a. Granular Fill: Within 21 days of initial delivery of material and for any change in product used. 2.02 MARKING TAPE A. Nondetectable: 1. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil. 2. Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 3. Width: 3 inches. 4. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. b. Mutual Industries; Non-detectable Tape. c. Presco; Non-detectable Tape. B. Color: In accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code. Color* Facility Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lightning cables Orange Communicating alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous materials Green Sewers and drain lines Blue Potable water *As specified in NEMA Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 2.03 EARTHFILL A. Excavated material from required excavations, free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials. B. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish Work. 2.04 GRANULAR FILL A. 1-inch minus crushed gravel or crushed rock. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 FILL AND BACKFILL JULY 2021 31 23 23 - 5 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS B. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material. C. Well-graded from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to bind material when compacted, but with maximum 8 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve. 2.05 BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL A. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material. B. Clean gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified 1. Pipe Under 18-Inch Diameter: 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except 1/4 inch for copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe under 3-inch diameter. 2. Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable: a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve. b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges. c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve. d. If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318. 2.06 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Granular fill or CLSM as shown on Drawings. 2.07 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) A. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 psi and 150 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832. B. Materials: 1. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, Size 7. 3. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618, except as modified herein: a. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted otherwise, maximum 3 percent. 4. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT FILL AND BACKFILL PW\DEN003\709275 31 23 23 - 6 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2.08 BACKFILL AROUND BURIED TANKS A. As shown on Drawings. 2.09 WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING A. Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper compaction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials. B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water. C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure and buried tank even. D. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill: 1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 6 inches to 12 inches above top of item to be laid. 2. Excavate trench for installation of item. 3. Install bedding, if applicable, as shown on Drawings. 4. Install item. 5. Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as specified herein or shown on Drawings before resuming filling or backfilling specified in this section. E. Provide the proper size and type of compaction equipment and select the proper method to attain the required compaction density while safeguarding the pipe and other utilities and structures. F. Tolerances: 1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 FILL AND BACKFILL JULY 2021 31 23 23 - 7 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse slopes are not permitted. G. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of fill or backfill material. 3.02 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES A. Earth Backfill: Backfill with earthfill to top elevation of pipe trenches. Place in lifts of 6-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum 95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. B. CLSM: After pipe installation and all pipe trench compaction is complete including installation of conduits, backfill remainder of excavation with CLSM. CLSM backfill beneath top slab and sidewalks shall accommodate thickness of top slab and sidewalks as shown on Drawings. CLSM backfill in surrounding areas shall make allowances for placing topsoil in vegetated areas to be restored. 3.03 TRENCH BOTTOM A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material if shown or specified. 3.04 PIPE BEDDING A. Furnish imported bedding material. B. Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when required depth exceeds 8 inches. C. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface. 3.05 PIPE ZONE A. Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations. B. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes, conduit, and cables installed in same trench. 1. Pipe 10-Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to 1/2 pipe diameter. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT FILL AND BACKFILL PW\DEN003\709275 31 23 23 - 8 JULY 2021 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS C. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by “walking in” and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift. D. After full depth of pipe zone material has been placed as specified, compact material by a minimum of three passes with a vibratory plate compactor only over area between sides of pipe and trench walls. Each lift shall be compacted with a minimum of two passes. Take care to avoid damaging pipe and pipe coating. 3.06 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Backfill trench above pipe zone with granular backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 inches. Compact each lift to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction prior to placing succeeding lifts. B. In the vicinity of the wet well structure and beneath the top slab, backfill trenches above pipe zone with CLSM. 3.07 SITE TESTING A. Gradation: 1. One sample from each 1,500 tons of finished product or more often as determined by Engineer, if variation in gradation is occurring, or if material appears to depart from Specifications. 2. If test results indicate material does not meet Specification requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures are taken. 3. Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification requirements. B. In-Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D6938. During placement of materials, test as follows: 1. Backfill Around Structures: minimum each side of wetwell at approximately 50 percent of depth and an additional test at or near the surface. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 FILL AND BACKFILL JULY 2021 31 23 23 - 9 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 3.08 REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Replace excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by Engineer as follows: 1. Beneath Footings: Concrete fill, 2,000 psi concrete. 2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or backfill. 3.09 REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL A. Replace topsoil in top 12 inches of backfilled areas not restored with hard surfacing. B. Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as necessary to restore drainage. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 1 SECTION 33 32 13.14 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Ladder Institute (ALI): A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Hydraulic Institute (HI): a. 11.6, Rotodynamic Submersible Pumps, For Hydraulic Performance, Hydrostatic Pressure, Mechanical and Electrical Acceptance Tests. b. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D3753, Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells. b. D5685, Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pressure Pipe Fittings. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1, (2011) Motors and Generators. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910.27, Fixed Ladders. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work includes retrofitting one submersible pump station and related work. The systems described herein include a fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) wetwell insert with the internal mechanical and instrumentation components preinstalled (except as noted in this section), and the submersible pumps shipped uninstalled. It is the intent of this design that the packaged lift station supplier take design responsibility for assuring that the pumps, wetwell, piping, pipe supports, access hatches, overhead concrete sidewalk slab, and miscellaneous components are integrated into a complete assembly that is delivered to the Site ready to install. The overall system shall be designed by a qualified engineer registered as a Professional Engineer in Washington State. The pump station shall be equipped with three submersible pumps, configured in a Lead/Lag/Standby arrangement. The pump station system shall accommodate and include a cover and access hatch rated for H-20 duty. The FRP wetwell shall accommodate the existing connections to two below-grade inlet sewers and shallower existing piping and conduit CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS connections to enable matching the function of the existing wet well. The system shall fully-designed by Contractor or Contractor’s subcontractor, complete and ready for installation. B. The Work includes incorporation of two new level elements and appurtenances, new pumps and motors including monitoring devices (motor temperature and moisture detection), it is the intention of this design that the new components maintain comparable functionality and performance as the existing pump station as controlled by the existing pump control system. No modifications to the current pump control logic are anticipated, but it is the Contractor’s responsibility to confirm compatibility of new components with the existing control system, verify that existing level control setpoints are replicated, and make adjustments to component configurations (e.g., variable frequency drive calibrations) as necessary to provide a fully functioning pump station. Contractor shall work with and coordinate their efforts with the Owner. 1.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) wet well insert system shall be designed by a qualified professional engineer certified as a professional engineer in the State of Washington. B. In addition to the FRP insert structure itself, the overall FRP wet well system shall be designed by a qualified professional engineer certified as a professional engineer in the State of Washington. C. Design Loads: 1. As shown on Drawings and included herein. 2. Gravity Design Loads: Superimposed loads from top slab including HS- 20 vehicle design load. 3. Seismic Design Loads and Parameters as indicated in Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. 4. Lateral soil pressure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data: a. Pipe and fittings. b. Submersible pumps and motors including guide rail system. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 3 c. PE-stamped and signed FRP wetwell insert system including drawings, calculations, specifications, product data, details for all aspects of the system (concrete slab, pumps, motors, hatches, electrical, piping, piping supports, ladder, pump supports, inlet pipe sleeves, annular space grouting, instrumentation devices, supports for devices and electrical, safety netting, and installation features (as applicable). d. Pipe couplings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submersible Pumps Data Package. b. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Include pumps, alarms, and motors. Include all information on all equipment, alarm panel and controls, pumps and pump performance curves, and station layout. 4. Calculations of FRP wetwell insert and accessories. Include IBC and Project-specific design criteria, in addition to manufacturer’s specific criteria used for design. All details shall satisfy the minimum requirements and sizes herein specified or shown on Drawings. Calculations shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Washington. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Delivery and Storage: Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials in enclosures or under protective covering. Store rubber gaskets not to be installed immediately under cover, out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep interior of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. B. Handling: Handle pipe, fittings, valves, FRP wetwell, pumps, motors, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the pump station in sound, undamaged condition. Avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make satisfactory repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Carry pipe to the pump station; do not drag it. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. FRP Wetwell Designer: Registered professional engineer licensed to perform Work in the State of Washington. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 2. Experience requirements for FRP Wetwell Manufacturer shall include five or more FRP wetwells of similar size and character to specified Work within 5 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS A. Provide submersible pumps as shown on Drawings and as listed on the pump data sheet supplements at the end of this section. Provide submersible, centrifugal pumps capable of handling all materials found in typical domestic sewage including plastics, rubber, sanitary napkins, disposable diapers, stringy material, and wooden articles. Pump capacity and motor characteristics as indicated. Design pump to operate in a submerged or partially submerged condition. Provide an integral sliding guide bracket and two stainless steel guide bars for each pump capable of supporting the entire weight of the pumping unit. B. Casing: Provide hard, close-grained cast iron casing, which is free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks, and other deleterious defects. Design casings to permit replacement of wearing parts. Design passageways to permit smooth flow of sewage and to be free of sharp turns and projections. C. Impeller: Provide non-clogging, self-cleaning type impeller constructed of hardened, high-strength cast iron alloy with a hardness of 60 HRC. Make impeller with smooth surfaces, free flowing with the necessary clearance to permit objects in the sewage to pass. Fit and key, spline, or thread impeller on shaft, and lock in such manner that lateral movement will be prevented and reverse rotation will not cause loosening. Include replaceable, hardened cast iron alloy (60 HRC) wear rings. D. Shaft and Shaft Seals: Provide shaft of stainless steel. Provide mechanical seal of tungsten-carbide with small back-swept grooves laser inscribed upon its face. Hold rotating tungsten carbide in mating position with stationary carbons by a stainless steel spring. Oil lubricate bearings. E. Bearings: Provide heavy-duty ball thrust bearing or roller type bearing of adequate size to withstand imposed loads. Oil lubricate bearings. F. Pump and Motor: Use pump and motor assembled on a single stainless steel shaft in a heavy-duty cast-iron shell. Pump shall be supported by the discharge elbow with sufficient clearance for solids to pass through the impeller. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 5 G. Discharge Elbow: Shall be made of cast iron or stainless steel and be capable of supporting the pump. Shall be constructed in a way that pumps can be removed and installed using the lifting chain and guide rails without entering the wetwell. H. Lifting Arrangement: 1. Provide one chain and one “grip-eye” per pump. 2. Stainless steel chain, 2 feet minimum, length as required to lift pump from sump depth as shown on Drawings. 3. Attach chain permanently to pump and access platform with stainless steel wire rope. 4. “Grip-eye” shall be capable of engaging links of stainless steel chain so pump and motor may be lifted with “grip-eye” and independent hoist. I. Sliding Guide Bracket: 1. Integral part of pump unit. 2. Pump unit to be guided by no less than two stainless steel guide bars, or equivalent cable system, and pressed tightly against discharge connection elbow with metal-to-metal contact or through use of profile- type gasket, provided gasket is attached to pump’s flange and can be easily accessed for inspection when pump is lifted out of wetwell. 3. Pump metal parts that come into contact with guide rail or cable system shall be made of non-sparking materials. J. Guide Rail Support Bar: A support bar of Type 316 stainless steel or FRP shall be provided for the support of the guide rails for pump insertion and removal. K. Drain and Inspection Plug: Oil chamber between seals shall be equipped with drain and inspection plug. Plug shall have positive antileak seal and shall be easily accessible from outside. L. Cable Entry System: 1. Pump motor and sensor cables suitable for submersible pump application. 2. Pump motor and sensor cables sizing shall conform to NFPA 70. 3. Pump motor and sensor cables lengths shall be sufficient lengths to reach junction boxes without strain or splicing. 4. Sealed cable connections to allow for pump removal without disconnecting wiring from the pump while submerged. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 5. Junction chamber and motor separated by stator lead sealing gland or terminal board that prevents foreign material entering through pump top. 6. Utilize cable with factory-installed sealing gland with non-shrink epoxy seal system. 7. O-ring compression seal between sealing gland and cable entry point shall also be acceptable. 8. Cable system shall maintain hazardous area conduit seal requirements until pump has been completely removed for maintenance from the hazardous classification space. M. Factory Performance Test: 1. In accordance with HI 11.6, Level B for submersible pump tests. 2. Include test data sheets, and curve test results. 3. Conduct on each pump. 4. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions: Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at least at full open, one-half closed, and shutoff conditions. 5. Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HI 11.6. 2.02 PUMP MOTOR A. General: Provide submersible sewage pumps in wetwell with inverter duty motors rated for NEMA MG 1, 460-volt, three-phase, and 60-Hz cycle and for submersible pumps. Motor horsepower must be not less than pump horsepower at any point on the pump performance curve. Fit motors with lifting “eyes” capable of supporting entire weight of pump and motor. B. Electrical Requirements: Furnish submersible motors with their respective pumps. Electric motor shall be hermetically sealed. Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment. C. Protection: 1. Each pump motor stator shall incorporate three thermal switches, one per stator phase winding and be connected in series, to monitor the temperature of the motor. Should the thermal switches open, the motor shall stop and activate an alarm. 2. A float switch shall be installed in the seal leakage chamber and will activate if leakage into the chamber reaches 50 percent chamber capacity, signaling the need to schedule an inspection. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 7 3. The thermal switches and float switch shall be connected to a CAS control and status monitoring unit. The Mini CAS unit shall be installed into the pump control panel. D. Pump motor and controls shall be compatible with the existing pump station control and pump drive systems. Existing pumps are operated by variable frequency drives (VFDs). Contractor shall investigate existing control and power systems and provide new equipment that is compatible. 2.03 FRP WETWELL INSERT A. Access Hatch: 1. Contractor to provide access hatch as part of the top slab fabrication, as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, and as shown on Drawings. The access hatch and top slab design shall be coordinated with the wetwell and submersible pump package and interface such that all loads to the FRP wetwell are properly handled in accordance with the wet well design and the hatch location coordinated with the guide rail system for pump access/removal. 2. Provide a netting-type, fall protection system for the hatch opening in compliance with applicable OSHA requirements. B. Wetwell: 1. The main chamber shall be a vertical cylinder made integrally with a reinforced bottom capable of withstanding a full hydrostatic head from the exterior of the tank while the station is completely empty. 2. The station bottom shall include 6 inches at minimum, knuckle radius, smooth molded corners to minimize buildup of solids. 3. Bottom shall be cored for stiffness with solid sections where pump anchor bolts are located. These bolts are to be permanently laminated into this solid section and sealed. 4. The shell section will be made of FRP using the filament winding process and shall have a finished minimum wall thickness of 0.6 inches. This process provides maximum strength to weight ratio. 5. Chamber shall also be constructed to handle the external ground loads for the specific application and also withstand both corrosive environments of the liquids inside and outside the wetwell. 6. Filament wound external reinforcing ribs shall be provided for additional strength against buckling and also provide a method of securing the lifting lugs. Quantity and size of these ribs shall be calculated for each application. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 7. Main chamber is to be designed for mounting and removal of the submersible pumps specified. 8. The interior finish is to be a smooth, bright white molded finish for ease of cleaning. 9. Shall conform to ASTM D3753 or Amec 4S-10.01, Manufacture and Installation for FRP structures and Canadian Government Standard RTP-1 (safety factor of 4), where applicable and be manufactured in North America. 10. Materials: a. The white interior finish shall a premium isophthalic NPG gelcoat. b. Resin for the corrosion liner and structural layers shall be a premium grade isophthalic polyester at minimum. c. Vinyl esters resins shall be used on the corrosion liner for leachate or more severe corrosive environments. d. Glass fiber reinforcing materials other than the surfacing veil is to be commercial Grade “E” type glass. e. Laminate Construction: All FRP laminates shall have a corrosion liner on surfaces that are exposed to corrosive environment and a structural laminate. The tank shell and its external reinforcing ribs shall use the helical filament winding process for the structure. The structural laminate shall be by the hand lay-up/spray-up method for all sections or parts other than the tank shell. f. Corrosion Liner: The surface of the liner exposed to the corrosive medium shall be resin rich reinforced with a “C” grade surfacing veil. The veil shall be saturated with white pigmented resin or an ISO-NPG white gelcoat. This layer is to be 0.01-inch minimum thickness. The liner behind the surfacing veil shall have a minimum thickness of 0.10 inch and shall be reinforced with not less than 20 percent and not more than 30 percent by weight of noncontinuous chopped strand mat. The inside surface is to be a smooth molded surface with a bright white finish. Corrosion liner shall be free of air and voids for optimum corrosion resistance. g. Structural Laminates: Once the liner is completed and cured, the remainder of the wall thickness of FRP laminates shall be built up to provide sufficient strength to meet the mechanical requirements. The tank shell shall be filament wound in a helical pattern, while the top and base are to be fabricated using the hand lay-up or spray-up methods. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 9 h. Hand Layup Construction: In hand lay-up laminates, alternate layers of chopped stand mat and woven roving, saturated in catalyzed resin, shall be added until the required of layers have been applied or the required wall thickness has been obtained. The exterior of the laminate shall consist of a chopped strand mat. Glass content shall be between 30 percent and 50 percent by weight. Laminate should be properly wetted out and rolled out, free of air voids as per design specifications. i. Filament Winding Construction: Filament wound structural laminates provide superior strength to weight ratio by a higher glass content than hand lay-up or chop-hoop winding methods. Filament wound laminates shall be constructed by saturating continuous strand glass roving in a controlled pattern over the corrosion liner on a suitable mold. The rovings shall be applied at an angle to the axis of the mold. This winding angle shall be selected by the fabricator to obtain the desired hoop and longitudinal properties required for each application. It shall be uniform throughout the entire length and thickness of the product. Each cover or bi-directional layer, is to consist of two complete layers of continuous rovings. As many of these covers will be applied as is required to provide adequate thickness for the mechanical loads of each application. The winding pattern shall be regular and shall produce a dense laminate without unreinforced resin pockets or air bridging between the rovings. Glass content shall be between 60 percent to 70 percent by weight. C. Anchor Bolts: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter (unless a larger minimum size is shown on Drawings) Type 316 stainless steel; number and size as required by equipment manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. D. Vents: An 8-inch vent nozzle for the FRP wetwell is to be provided. Vent piping shall be located as specified on Drawings. E. Access Ladder: 1. An access ladder shall provide a safe access to the station bottom. Materials for this ladder shall be FRP or stainless steel. 2. Fabricate ladder with rails, rungs, landings, and cages to meet applicable requirements of OSHA, CFR Part 1910.27, and ALI A14.3. a. Design ladder for concentrated load of 200 pounds imposed by user concentrated at points that will cause maximum stress in structural member being considered. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS b. Include weight of ladder and attached appurtenances together with live load in design of rails and fastenings. F. Influent and Discharge Connections: 1. All nozzle connections to the wetwell wall shall be fabricated from FRP and laminated to the tank wall with inside and outside lay-ups using laminating resins equivalent to the resin used in the shell construction. 2. Acceptable inlet connection includes full faced FRP flange and plain end as shown on Drawings. The full face FRP flange shall be of a 50 psi design for the inlet. 3. Acceptable discharge connections shall be restrained mechanical joint, proprietary restrained fittings, or flange. 4. Provide gussets or “tabs” on the wetwell shell for anchoring minimum two thrust rods at the pressurized discharge pipe nozzles. 5. The length of the nozzle spool piece shall accommodate the distance from the wetwell shell to at least 6 inches inside the existing pipe as required for proper fit-up to field connections for inlet sewers and other pipe connections located below the top elevation of the demolished concrete wetwell. Field connections shall be completed in the field by the manufacturer’s crew. FRP nozzles and their attachment layups to the wetwell shell are to be made in the field using alternate layers of chopped strand mats and woven roving with an overall glass content between 30 percent to 40 percent. 6. Shall conform to ASTM D5685 where applicable. G. Drop Inlets: Provide FRP drop inlets at the two sewer inlets to direct incoming sewage flow towards the bottom of the wetwell and be open at the top to allow for ventilation and overflow. Drop inlets shall be supported from the wall and extend to within 4 feet of bottom of wetwell. H. Surface Finish: 1. Inside: All inside surfaces should be smooth and free of cracks and crazing. The inside surface will be pigmented or gel-coated to a bright white finish. All surfaces other than those made in contact with the mold surface shall be coated with air-inhibited resin or gelcoat, this includes any cut edges of laminates. 2. Outside: All external surfaces are to be resin coated with an air inhibited resin coat, including any drilled holes, ground areas or cut edges. The portion of the station to be above ground level shall be painted with high UV gelcoat. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 11 I. Lifting Lugs: 1. A minimum of four lifting lugs, each capable of handling the entire weight of the station are required. 2. These lugs will also be capable of handling a lift elevating the wetwell from the horizontal position to the vertical position. 3. Material can be mild steel epoxy coated, galvanized, or stainless steel. 2.04 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. FRP Pipe: All piping and fittings within or connected to the FRP wetwell shall be made of filament-wound, 200 psi rated FRP. The FRP piping shall be painted with a bright white gelcoat. All flanges shall be full and flat face type and have ANSI B16.1, Class 125 flange pattern. B. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1. Pump discharge piping connecting to the existing discharge pipes shall be cement-lined ductile iron for buried liquid service using mechanical or proprietary restrained joints in accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11 and AWWA C151/A21.51, pressure class conforming to Table 5 and Table 7 for Type 4 trench, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron. 2. Provide pipe and fittings with cement-mortar lining per AWWA C104/A21.4 and standard asphaltic coating. 3. Bolting: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M hex head bolts; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts, and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. 4. Ductile iron piping shall be encapsulated in polyethylene bagging prior to backfilling. C. PVC Pipe: 1. Piping associated with the odor control vent and valve vault drain are documented to be Schedule PVC pipe; confirm material and dimensions in the field. 2. The chemical feed pipe is 1 1/2 inch nominal diameter but the material is unknown; it is likely PVC or perhaps HDPE. Confirm material and dimensions in the field. 3. These existing pipes are intended to remain below the top elevation of the demolished concrete wetwell, therefore, no new PVC is anticipated for the odor control vent or valve vault drain. Extend the chemical feed pipe into the new FRP wetwell and elbow 90 degrees down with a 2-foot extension piece. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. CISP Pipe: a. The building drain is reportedly 3 inch cast iron soil pipe (CISP) where it enters the wetwell; confirm material and dimensions in the field. b. This existing pipe will remain below the top elevation of the demolished concrete wetwell, therefore, no new CISP is anticipated. However, the FRP field-connection piece must be capable of being affixed to the inside diameter of the existing pipe. D. Couplings: 1. Flexible Mechanical Compression Joint Coupling: a. Elastomeric sleeve, b. Stainless steel racketing bands, ASTM A276, Type 305 stainless steel. c. Manufacturers: 1) Pipeline Products Corp. 2) Fernco Joint Sealer Co. 2. Restrained Sleeve Coupling: a. One-piece construction that can accommodate up to 4 degrees deflection per end. b. Ductile iron center and end rings, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. c. Ductile iron grippers, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. d. Gaskets: SBR or NBR per ASTM D2000. e. Type 304 stainless steel hardware, “internal” components. f. Fusion-bonded epoxy coating on center ring; polyester coating on end rings. g. Manufacturer: Romac Industries, Alpha. E. Duck-Bill Check Valves: 1. Molded elastomeric check valves for installation on pipe ends. 2. Neoprene (or as recommended for sewage service) tube, Type 316 stainless steel bands and hardware. 3. Manufacturer and Model: Tideflex; TF-2 Series. 2.05 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT (BAGGING) A. Encasement Tube: Black polyethylene encasement tube, 8 mils minimum thickness, conforming to AWWA C105/A21.5, free of gels, streaks, pinholes, foreign matter, undispersed raw materials, and visible defects such as tears, blisters, and thinning at folds. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 13 B. Securing Tape: Thermoplastic tape, 8 miles minimum thickness, 1-inch wide, pressure sensitive adhesive tape capable of bonding to metal, bituminous coating, and polyethylene encasement tube. 2.06 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS A. New level sensors (ultrasonic and pressure transducer) are specified on Drawings, and shall be installed by Contractor after installation of the wetwell. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide pump station in accordance with Drawings and requirements of the respective equipment manufacturers. B. Equipment Installation: 1. Install equipment in accordance with these Specifications and the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Grout equipment mounted on concrete foundations before installing piping. Install piping to avoid imposing stress on any equipment. Match flanges accurately before securing bolts. 2. Mount discharge elbow to the floor of the wetwell with stainless steel bolts. 3. Connect piping without imposing strain to flanges. 4. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor of the sump. C. FRP Wetwell Installation: 1. Vendor is responsible for delivery of the wetwell to the Job Site, interior piping and supports, appurtenances as noted, provision of pipe spools to allow later installation of the flow tube, and connection of the FRP influent and discharge nozzles to the FRP tank. The manufacturer’s field crew shall connect the FRP influent nozzles to the connecting pipes from inside the FRP wetwell. 2. Contractor is responsible for: a. Off-loading the wetwell at the Job Site. b. Excavation and backfill. c. Filling the bottom of existing wetwell with grout to create a level surface for the FRP wetwell insert. d. Setting in place of the wetwell, using proper lifting rigging (e.g., spreader bar). CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 14 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS e. Backfilling with grout in stages, close to the lowest connection and then up to the top of the remainder of existing concrete wetwell after all piping connections are completed. f. Connection of the wetwell piping to the yard piping at the wall of the FRP wetwell and sealing of conduits, and external discharge piping. g. Installing the pumps and guide rail system in the station. h. Installation of vents. i. Provision and installation of wiring and conduit from the pumps and instrumentation to pump station power and control connections. j. Coordinate penetrations for conduit with vendor. Penetrations that are not shop fabricated shall be performed with a diamond or carbide grit hole saw. k. Site surface restoration. D. Piping Installation: 1. Pump Discharge Piping: a. Provide thrust restraint for the pump discharge pipes using restrained fittings and components. b. FRP Nozzles: 1) Restrained couplings cannot be fully tightened on FRP pipe nozzles, therefore, provide alternative thrust restraint means. 2) FRP wetwell manufacturer shall provide gussets or other means to attach one end of thrust rods to wetwell shell. Provide for two thrust rods per pipe to equalize forces on coupling. Other end of thrust rods shall be anchored directly to ductile iron discharge pipes. c. Complete installation of polyethylene bagging on buried ductile iron piping after successful leakage testing. 3.02 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing, except that water and electric power needed for field tests will be furnished as set forth in Division 01. Produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with contract requirements. Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 5 days before testing any section of piping where concrete thrust blocks have been provided. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 - 15 B. Wetwell Liner Hydrostatic Leak Test: After installation and completion of pipe connections, conduct a leakage test of the FRP liner. 1. Plug all pipe openings and penetrations. 2. Fill FRP wetwell and observe water surface to determine if any leakage is present. 3. Conduct test for minimum 30 minutes or as needed to inspect for any leakage. No leakage is allowed. 4. After successful completion of leakage test, properly dispose of the water as per the direction of Project Representative. C. Pump Discharge Pipe Hydrostatic Test: 1. Fluid: Clean water. 2. Perform testing on installed piping prior to backfilling. 3. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or loosen flanges or use equipment vents to purge air pockets. 4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure of 105 psig, or 150 percent of maximum pump shutoff head, whichever is greater, continuously for 30 minutes, minimum, and for such additional time as necessary to examine for leakage. 5. Examine joints and connections for leakage. 6. Correct visible leakage and retest until successful test is accomplished. D. Submersible Pump Lift Station: 1. Test in operation all equipment to demonstrate compliance with the Contract requirements. 2. Functional Test: Conduct on each pump. a. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment, connection, and quiet operation. b. Flow Output: Measured using existing flowmeter. c. Test Report Requirements: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards for submersible pump tests HI 14.6 and 11.6. 3. Test pumps and controls, in operation, under design conditions to insure proper operation of all equipment. Provide all appliances, materials, water, and equipment for testing, and bear all expenses in connection with the testing. Conduct testing after all equipment is properly installed, electrical services and piping are installed, liquid is flowing, and the pump station is ready for operation. Correct all defects discovered to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner, and all tests repeated, at the expense of the Contractor, until the equipment is in proper working order. CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 - 16 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 4. Contractor shall be responsible for fully testing all new pumping equipment and instrumentation to verify full compatibility and functionality with the existing pump control system to maintain current pump control strategy including equipment safety features. E. Field Quality Control: 1. Test Report Documentation: a. Test date. b. Description and identification of piping or equipment tested. c. Test fluid, flow, pressure, and/or process value, as applicable. d. Remarks, including: 1) Leaks (type, location), as applicable. 2) Repair/replacement performed to remedy deficiency. e. Signed by Contractor, Engineer, and Owner to represent that test has been satisfactorily completed. 3.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this Specification: 1. Gaines Street Submersible Pump Data Sheet. END OF SECTION CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PW\DEN003\709275 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, JULY 2021 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS 33 32 13.14 DATA SHEET - 1 GAINES STREET SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET Tag Numbers: Pump Name: Pump 1, Pump 2, and Pump 3 Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) FLYGT NP3202HT460N (2) SERVICE CONDITIONS Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Raw Sewage Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 50 Max 75 Min 40 Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0 pH: 5 to 8 Abrasive (Y/N) Y Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): Y Total suspended solids (mg/L) 350 Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches) 3 Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 17.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 1,000 Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 100 Maximum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 161 Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 65 Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): Constant (Y): 1750 Adjustable (Y/N): Y DESIGN AND MATERIALS Pump Type: Heavy-Duty Non-clog (Y/N) Y Other: Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 CITY OF PORT TOWNSEND GAINES STREET PS LINER RETROFIT PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, PW\DEN003\709275 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP TYPE JULY 2021 33 32 13.14 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2021 JACOBS Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Elastomers: Nitrile Rubber Fasteners: Stainless Steel Impeller: Type: Double-Shrouded Non-Clog (Y/N): Y Other: Material: Hardened, high-strength cast iron alloy with a hardness of 60 HRC Shaft Material: Carbon Steel, ASTM A576 with stainless steel sleeve or all stainless steel. Base Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): Y Bearing Life (Hrs): DRIVE MOTOR Horsepower: 60 Voltage: 460 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1750 Enclosure: EXP CLASSIFICATION: Class 1, Group D, Division 1 Other Features: Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y Loose-shipped relay for each pump for moisture and thermal sensors to be installed in control panel. Relay to be 24V dc powered. PART 4 DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)